- Vehicles & accessories
- Cars
- Volvo
- 2012 XC60
- Owner's manual
- 374 Pages
Volvo 2012 XC60 Owner's Manual
advertisement
Assistant Bot
Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
374
VOLVO XC60 Owner's Manual Web Edition Welcome to the world-wide family of Volvo owners. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please contact your Volvo retailer or see the section "Contacting Volvo" in this manual's "Introduction" chapter for information on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada. Contents 00 01 02 4 00 Introduction 01 Safety Important information................................. 8 Environment.............................................. 12 Important warnings................................... 13 Occupant safety........................................ Reporting safety defects........................... Seat belts ................................................. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .... Occupant Weight Sensor ......................... Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ..... Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................... Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS..... Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ......... Crash mode.............................................. Child safety............................................... Child restraint systems............................. Infant seats............................................... Convertible seats...................................... Booster cushions...................................... ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors.................. Top tether anchors.................................... Integrated booster cushion....................... Child safety locks...................................... 02 Locks and alarm 16 17 18 21 26 30 32 33 35 36 37 40 42 44 46 47 48 49 52 Remote key and key blade....................... Keyless drive............................................. Locks........................................................ Alarm......................................................... 56 63 66 69 Contents 03 04 05 03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Infotainment Instruments and controls.......................... 74 Ignition modes.......................................... 82 Seats......................................................... 84 Steering wheel.......................................... 90 Lighting..................................................... 92 Wipers and washers................................. 98 Power windows....................................... 101 Mirrors..................................................... 103 Compass*............................................... 105 Laminated panoramic roof*.................... 106 Volvo Sensus.......................................... 130 Menus and messages............................. 131 The MY CAR menus............................... 133 Climate system....................................... 139 Trip computer......................................... 147 Stability system....................................... 149 Active chassis system–Four C*............... 151 Cruise control.......................................... 152 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*.............. 154 Distance Alert* ....................................... 164 City Safety™ .......................................... 167 Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*............................. 172 Driver Alert System* ............................... 180 Park assist*............................................. 186 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* ............ 190 Blind Spot Information System*.............. 194 Passenger compartment convenience... 198 Introduction............................................. Getting started ....................................... General infotainment functions .............. Radio....................................................... Media player........................................... AUX/USB sockets................................... HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.... Starting the engine.................................. Transmission........................................... Brakes..................................................... Parking brake.......................................... Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................... 109 112 116 119 122 125 204 206 211 214 223 227 Bluetooth media ................................... 230 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ........ Cell phone voice control......................... Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ............. Remote control*...................................... Infotainment system menus ................... 233 241 245 254 256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents 06 07 08 06 During your trip Driving recommendations....................... Refueling................................................. Loading................................................... Cargo area ............................................. Towing a trailer....................................... Emergency towing.................................. 6 07 Wheels and tires 262 266 271 275 278 281 General information ............................... Tire inflation............................................. Inflation pressure ................................... Tire designations .................................... Glossary of tire terminology ................... Vehicle loading ....................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading ................. Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires . Temporary Spare ................................... Tire Sealing System................................ Changing a wheel .................................. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 286 289 291 292 294 295 297 298 299 300 306 309 08 Maintenance and specifications Volvo maintenance.................................. Maintaining your car............................... Hood and engine compartment.............. Engine oil................................................ Fluids...................................................... Replacing bulbs...................................... Wiper blades and washer fluid................ Battery..................................................... Fuses...................................................... Vehicle care............................................. 314 315 317 318 320 322 329 331 334 342 Contents 09 10 09 Specifications 10 Index Label information.................................... 350 Specifications......................................... 352 Overview of information and warning symbols......................................................... 359 Volvo programs....................................... 362 Index....................................................... 364 7 Introduction Important information Contacting Volvo About this manual In the USA: • Before you operate your vehicle for the first Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.us In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp National Customer Service • Information contained in the balance of the Risk of injury • The manual is structured so that it can be used for reference. For this reason, it should be kept in the vehicle for ready access. Footnotes 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocars.ca Display texts North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 There are various types of decals in the vehicle whose purpose is to provide important information in a clear and concise way. The importance of these decals is explained as follows, in descending order of importance. manual is extremely useful and should be read after operating the vehicle for the first time. Certain pages of this manual contain information in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the page. This information supplements the text that the footnote number refers to (a letter is used if the footnote refers to text in a table). 175 Gordon Baker Road 8 time, please familiarize yourself with the information found in the chapters "Your Driving Environment" and "During Your Trip." Decals G031590 There are several displays in the driver’s field of vision that show messages generated by various systems and functions in the vehicle. These texts are indicated in the Owner’s Manual by being in slightly larger type than the surrounding text and are printed in gray, (for example: Change doors unlock setting). Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background. Decals of this type are used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could result in serious injury or death. Introduction Important information Risk of damage to the vehicle Information Types of lists used in the manual Procedures Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions that must be carried out in a certain order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a black or blue warning background and space for a message. If the information on decals of this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could result. G031593 G031592 If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a black background. These decals provide general information. NOTE The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the vehicle. Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are carried out is not important. Arrows with or without numbers are used to indicate the direction of a movement. If there are no illustrations associated with a step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are indicated by ordinary numbers. Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in general overview illustrations in which certain components are pointed out. The corresponding number is also used in the position list's description of the various components. 9 Introduction Important information Bullet lists Bullets are used to differentiate a number of components/functions/points of information that can be listed in random order. NOTE • For example: • Coolant • Engine oil Continued ` `This symbol can be found at the lower right corner of an odd-numbered (right-hand) page to indicate that the current topic is continued on the following page. Options and accessories Optional or accessory equipment described in this manual is indicated by an asterisk. Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information. 10 All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. • Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation. • Do not export your Volvo to another country before investigating that country's applicable safety and emission control requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries. WARNING If your vehicle is involved in an accident, unseen damage may affect its drivability and safety. WARNING CALIFORNIA proposition 65 Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. WARNING Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. Introduction Important information Shiftlock Points to keep in mind Vehicle event data (Black box) When your vehicle is parked, the gear selector is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the selector from this position, the ignition must be in mode II (see page 82) or the engine must be running. Depress the brake pedal, press the button on the front side of the gear selector and move the selector from P (Park). • Do not export your Volvo to another coun- Your vehicle's driving and safety systems employ computers that monitor, and share with each other, information about your vehicle's operation. One or more of these computers may store what they monitor, either during normal vehicle operation or in a crash or nearcrash event. Stored information may be read and used by: Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) try before investigating that country's applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries. The ABS system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module. This is normal. • All information, illustrations and specifica- Fuel filler door • Volvo reserves the right to make model Press the button on the light switch panel (see the illustration on page 268) when the vehicle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. tions contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all markets. • • • • Volvo Car Corporation service and repair facilities law enforcement or government agencies others who may assert a legal right to know, or who obtain your consent to know such information. changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation. Fuel filler cap The fuel filler door, located on the right rear quarter panel, is connected to your vehicle's central locking system. 11 Introduction Environment Volvo and the environment Volvo is committed to the well being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment, we care about the environment in which we all live. Caring for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Volvo's environmental activities are based on a holistic view, which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout its complete life cycle. In this context, design, production, product use, and recycling are all important considerations. In production, Volvo has partly or completely phased out several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals used in our plants 50% since 1991. Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into production a three-way catalytic converter with a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system of all models as far back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to 12 continuous environmental refinement of conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's environmental impact, you can: • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires. • Follow the recommended maintenance schedule in your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. • Drive at a constant speed whenever possible. • See a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle has started. • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc. • When cleaning your vehicle, please use genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car care products are formulated to be environmentally friendly. Recycling As part of Volvo’s commitment to the environment, it is essential for the vehicle to be recycled in an environmentally sound way. Almost the entire vehicle can be recycled and for that reason, the vehicle’s final owner is requested to contact a Volvo retailer for information about approved and certified recycling facilities. Introduction Important warnings Driver distraction A driver has a responsibility to do everything possible to ensure his or her own safety and the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part of that responsibility. Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication systems. These include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. When used properly and safely, they enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, any of these could cause a distraction. For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the strong Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In addition to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer features that may be found in your vehicle: • Never use a hand-held cellular telephone while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit cellular telephone use by a driver while the vehicle is moving. • If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use quicker and simpler. • Never use portable computers or personal digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. Accessory installation • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Accessories that have not been approved by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's systems. • Any of your car's performance and safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle. • Damage caused by unapproved or improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of non-genuine accessories. • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle. 13 Occupant safety...................................................................................... Reporting safety defects......................................................................... Seat belts ............................................................................................... Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ................................................... Occupant Weight Sensor ....................................................................... Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags ................................................... Inflatable Curtain (IC) ............................................................................. Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS................................................... Rollover Protection System (ROPS) ....................................................... Crash mode............................................................................................ Child safety............................................................................................. Child restraint systems........................................................................... Infant seats.............................................................................................. Convertible seats.................................................................................... Booster cushions.................................................................................... ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors................................................................. Top tether anchors.................................................................................. Integrated booster cushion..................................................................... Child safety locks.................................................................................... 14 16 17 18 21 26 30 32 33 35 36 37 40 42 44 46 47 48 49 52 SAFETY 01 Safety 01 Occupant safety Volvo's concern for safety Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Our concern dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled off the production line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energyabsorbing impact zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation. We will not compromise our commitment to safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255. Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old you are but rather on: • How well you see. • Your ability to concentrate. • How quickly you make decisions under stress to avoid an accident. The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment. 16 • Never drink and drive. • If you are taking any medication, consult your physician about its potential effects on your driving abilities. • Take a driver-retraining course. • Have your eyes checked regularly. • Keep your windshield and headlights clean. • Replace wiper blades when they start to leave streaks. • Take into account the traffic, road, and weather conditions, particularly with regard to stopping distance. • Never send text messages while driving. • Refrain from using or minimize the use of a cell phone while driving. 01 Safety Reporting safety defects Reporting safety defects in the U.S. http://www.safercar.gov If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emission recall or similar action, it should be completed as soon as possible. Please check with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC if your vehicle is covered under these conditions. NHTSA can be reached at: Internet: 01 Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. Transport Canada can be contacted at: 1-800-333-0510 Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1 http://www.nhtsa.gov Telephone: 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: 17 01 Safety 01 Seat belts General information in the event of a collision, limits the peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the occupant. Fastening a seat belt Buckling Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch plate into the receptacle until a distinct click is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. NOTE Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, a sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible, which is normal, and the seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. Seat belt retractor The seat belt retractor will lock up in the following situations: Adjusting the seat belt Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster seat determined by age, weight and height. Volvo also believes no child should sit in the front seat of a vehicle. Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. Seat belt pretensioners All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which, 18 • • • • • if the belt is pulled out rapidly during braking and acceleration if the vehicle is leaning excessively when driving in turns if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated See also page 38 for information about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR function to anchor a child seat. When wearing the seat belt remember: • The belt should not be twisted or turned. • The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen). • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up into its retractor and that the shoulder and lap belts are taut. Unbuckling the seat belt To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt back into the retractor slot. 01 Safety Seat belts Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap. WARNING • Never repair the belt yourself; have this work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three-point belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision. • The seat back should not be tilted too far back. The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly. • Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. WARNING Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their strength when exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged. Seat belt reminder G017726 Seat belt maintenance 01 Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console The seat belt reminder consists of an audible signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fasten their seat belts. The audible signal and indicator light will be on for a total of 6 seconds from the time the ignition is switched on, regardless of whether or not the seat belts are fastened. If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and warning light will be active for a total of 6 seconds. Rear seats The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has two additional functions: `` 19 01 Safety 01 Seat belts • It provides information about which seat Seat belt use during pregnancy a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel. belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after approximately 6 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button on the left steering wheel lever. Child seats Please refer to page 40 for information on securing child seats with the seat belts. occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the seat belt has been re-buckled or can be stopped by pressing the READ button. • The message Unbelted in rear seat will appear in the information display if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message in the information display can always be accessed, even if it has been erased, by pressing the READ button to display stored messages. G020998 • It also provides a reminder if one of the The seat belt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large 20 01 Safety Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) General information properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed. See also page 76 and page 78 for more information about indicator and warning symbols. WARNING • Warning symbols in the instrument panel As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts, your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags, side impact airbags, a front passenger occupant weight sensor, and inflatable curtains. All of these systems are monitored by the SRS control module. An SRS warning light in the instrument panel (see the illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in modes I, II, or III, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system. • If the SRS warning light stays on after the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving, have the vehicle inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Never try to repair any component or part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 01 WARNING If your vehicle has been subjected to flood conditions (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle) or if your vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way, do not attempt to start the vehicle or insert the remote key into the ignition slot before disconnecting the battery (see below). This may cause airbag deployment which could result in personal injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Automatic transmission: Before attempting to tow the vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. 2. Follow the instructions for manually overriding the shiftlock system on page 117. Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning `` 21 01 Safety 01 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Front airbags The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment. G018665 WARNING The front airbag system The front airbags supplement the three-point seat belts. For these airbags to provide the protection intended, seat belts must be worn at all times. The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas. Location of the passenger's side front airbag As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second. The location of the front airbags is indicated by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub. 22 • The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • Never drive with your hands on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • The front airbags are designed to help prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment and depending on variables such as seating position, one may experience abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other injuries as a result from deployment of one or both of the airbags. • When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction. 01 Safety Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Front airbag deployment • The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and object impacted. The airbags may also deploy in certain non-frontal collisions where rapid deceleration occurs. • The SRS sensors, which trigger the front airbags, are designed to react to both the impact of the collision and the inertial forces generated by it, and to determine if the intensity of the collision is sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to be deployed. However, not all frontal collisions activate the front airbags. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object at a low speed, the front airbags will not necessarily deploy. • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a side impact collision, in a collision from the rear or in a rollover situation. • The amount of damage to the bodywork does not reliably indicate if the airbags should have deployed or not. • • • WARNING Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened1. 1-800-458-1552 Never drive with the airbags deployed. The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle. Other safety systems can also be damaged. 175 Gordon Baker Road The smoke and dust formed when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure. www.volvocars.ca 01 www.volvocars.us In Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. National Customer Service North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255 Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support: In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information on page 26. `` 23 01 Safety Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) NOTE • • • Airbag decals Deployment of front airbags occurs only one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small amount of powder is released. The release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate fire. Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity. Passenger's side airbag decal 24 WARNING • Children must never be allowed in the front passenger's seat. • Occupants in the front passenger's seat must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit leaning toward the instrument panel or otherwise sit out of position. • The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the dash, seat or out of the window. G008335 01 01 Safety Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 01 WARNING • No objects or accessory equipment, e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag deployment (see the illustration on page 22). • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants. 25 01 Safety 01 Occupant Weight Sensor General information The OWS works with sensors that are part of the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). 2 The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when: • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, G017724 2 Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light Disabling the passenger's side front airbag Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag, and be properly restrained for their size and weight. For child safety recommendations,see page 38. The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag under certain conditions. 26 or has small/medium objects in the front seat, • the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, • the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, • the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat, • a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time, • a child or a small person occupies the front passenger's seat. The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead console, near the base of the rearview mirror. NOTE When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic test. However, if a fault is detected in the system: • The OWS indicator light will stay on • The SRS warning light (see page 21) will come on and stay on • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service urgen-64 will be displayed in the information display. WARNING If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. 01 Safety Occupant Weight Sensor WARNING • • Never try to open, remove, or repair any components in the OWS system. This could result in system malfunction. Maintenance or repairs should only be carried out by an a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The front passenger's seat should not be modified in any way. This could reduce pressure on the seat cushion, which might interfere with the OWS system's function. Passenger's seat occupancy status OWS indicator light status Passenger's side front airbag status Seat unoccupied OWS indicator light lights up. Passenger's side front airbag disabled Seat occupied by low weight occupant/ objectA OWS indicator light lights up Passenger's side front airbag disabled Seat occupied by heavy occupant/object OWS indicator light is not lit 01 BAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in an upright position. • Have the person sit upright in the seat, A Passenger's side front airbag enabled Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the passenger's side front airbag in the event of a collision anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIR- centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended. • Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag. • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. This condition reflects limitations of the OWS classification capability. It does not indicate OWS malfunction. Modifications If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for example by altering or adapting the driver's or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at: `` 27 01 Safety 01 Occupant Weight Sensor In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC WARNING • Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 In Canada • The seat belt should never be wrapped around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function. • The front passenger's seat belt should never be used in a way that exerts more pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. National Customer Service 175 Gordon Baker Road North York, Ontario M2H 2N7 1-800-663-8255 28 No objects that add to the total weight on the seat should be placed on the front passenger's seat. If a child is seated in the front passenger's seat with any additional weight, this extra weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child. WARNING • Keep the following points in mind with respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow these instructions could adversely affect the system's function and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat: • The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift him/herself off the seat cushion using the armrest in the door or the center console, by pressing the feet on the floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion, or by pressing against the backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause OWS to disable the front, passenger's side airbag. 01 Safety Occupant Weight Sensor 01 WARNING • Do not place any type of object on the front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (see page 38). • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function. 29 01 Safety 01 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags General information NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. G024377 G032949 Components in the SIPS airbag system Driver's side SIPS airbag Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. 30 G024378 As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags. Passenger's side SIPS airbag SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, and electronic sensors/wiring. 01 Safety Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags 01 WARNING • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident. 31 01 Safety 01 Inflatable Curtain (IC) General information This system consists of inflatable curtains located along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from the center of both front side windows to the rear edge of the rear side door windows. It is designed to help protect the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously. NOTE If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains inflated for approximately 3 seconds. 32 WARNING • The IC system is a supplement to the Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the rear of the vehicle. • Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Never hang heavy items from the ceiling handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. • The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. WARNING In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat, see page 38 for guidelines. Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants in an accident. 01 Safety Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS General information Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) – front seats only The WHIPS system consists of specially designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some of the energy generated in a collision from the rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended). In the event of a collision of this type, the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest/head restraint to help support the occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash. WARNING • The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed. 01 WARNING • Occupants in the front seats must never sit out of position. The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • If your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician, even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced. • Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself. `` 33 01 Safety 01 Whiplash Protection System – WHIPS WARNING 34 • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system. • If the rear seat backrests are folded down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system. WARNING Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded down, the occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear seat. 01 Safety Rollover Protection System (ROPS) 01 Volvo’s Rollover Protection System utilizes the Roll Stability Control (RSC) function, which is designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should occur. RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the amount of change in the lateral angle at which the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover, the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) is activated, power to the engine is cut and the brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability. For additional information on DSTC, see page 149. WARNING The vehicle’s stability systems, including ROPS and RSC, do not replace the driver’s responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to the current road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted speed limits should always be respected. 35 01 Safety 01 Crash mode function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc. WARNING • • Driving after a collision If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the information display. This indicates that the vehicle's functionality has been reduced. • Never attempt to repair the vehicle yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed Safety mode See manual. This could result in injury or improper system function. Restoring the vehicle to normal operating status should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. After Safety mode See manual has been displayed, if you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. NOTE This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact. Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one or more of the safety systems (e.g. front or side airbags, an inflatable curtain, or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners) has deployed. The collision may have damaged an important 36 Attempting to start the vehicle If damage to the vehicle is minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the vehicle. To do so: 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot and open the driver's door. If a message is displayed that the ignition is on, press the start button. 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the remote key in the ignition slot. 3. Try to start the vehicle. If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven and must be towed. Concealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to control. Moving the vehicle If the message Normal mode is displayed when Safety mode See manual is no longer displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traffic. It should, however, not be moved farther than is absolutely necessary. WARNING Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Safety mode has been set, it should not be driven or towed (pulled by another vehicle). There may be concealed damage that could make it difficult or impossible to control. The vehicle should be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/ repairs. 01 Safety Child safety Children should be seated safely Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint systems for all occupants including children. Remember that, regardless of age and size, a child should always be properly restrained in a vehicle. Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats. Some restraint systems for children are designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child restraint systems can help protect children in vehicles in the event of an accident only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions for your child restraint can result in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, a child held in a person's arms can be crushed between the vehicle's interior and an unrestrained person. The child could also be injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. The same can also happen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occupants should also be properly restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your state or province. Recent accident statistics have shown that children are safer in rear seating positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting a child restraint system: It should have a label certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213. Make sure the child restraint system is approved for the child's height, weight and development – the label required by the standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this information. 01 When a child has outgrown the child safety seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect the child here is to place the child on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly located on the hips (see the illustration on page 46). Legislation in your state or province may mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in combination with the seat belt, depending on the child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations. A specially designed and tested booster cushion and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo retailer. USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in height Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) in height In using any child restraint system, we urge you to carefully look over the instructions that are provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint system can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. `` 37 01 Safety 01 Child safety WARNING • • Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened. On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. Child seat should always be registered. See page 39 for more information. When attaching the seat belt to a child seat: 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle (lock) in the usual way. 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat. A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. WARNING Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ ELR) To make child seat installation easier, each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut. Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. Volvo's recommendations Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A front airbag is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed of inflation, a child should never be placed in the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up. Volvo has some very specific recommendations: • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a threepoint seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents. Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle. • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back 38 01 Safety Child safety 01 seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag. • Drive safely! Child restraint registration and recalls Registering a child restraint Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm. 39 01 Safety 01 Child restraint systems Convertible seat G023269 G022847 G022840 Child restraints Booster cushion Infant seat There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats, and booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size. The following section provides general information on securing a child restraint using a three-point seat belt. Refer to page 47–48 for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. 40 WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. WARNING Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information on securing the restraint. 01 Safety Child restraint systems 01 WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. 41 01 Safety 01 Infant seats WARNING G023270 G022844 Securing an infant seat with a seat belt Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat NOTE Refer to page 47–48 for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. WARNING • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. 42 G023271 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. Fasten the seat belt 01 Safety Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt Ensure that the seat is securely in place 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function. 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt. NOTE 01 G022850 G022846 Infant seats WARNING The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully. It should not be possible to move the child restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path. 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely. 43 01 Safety 01 Convertible seats Securing a convertible seat with a seat belt G018630 G022847 WARNING Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat NOTE Refer to pages 47 and 48 for information on securing a child restraint using ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child. 44 Route the seat belt through the convertible seat WARNING Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. • A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. 01 Safety Convertible seats 01 G022850 G022848 time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function. G022849 Fasten the seat belt Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt. WARNING NOTE The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully. 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this It should not be possible to move the child restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path. Ensure that the seat is securely in place WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. The convertible seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely. 45 01 Safety 01 Booster cushions Position the child correctly on the booster cushion Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats. 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. With the child properly seated on the booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 46 G022852 G022851 Securing a booster cushion Positioning the seat belt 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and fits snugly around the child. WARNING • The hip section of the three-point seat belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. • The shoulder section of the three-point seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm. 01 Safety ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child seat anchors 01 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions. Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped child seats are located in the rear, outboard seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the anchor positions as shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top tethers whenever possible. To access the anchors 1. Put the child restraint in position. 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. G018631 WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors NOTE • The rear seat's center position is not equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors. When installing a child restraint in this position, attach the restraint's top tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the top tether anchorage point and secure the restraint with the vehicle's center seat belt. • Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top tethers whenever possible. WARNING • Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration). If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a collision. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors are only intended for use with child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions. These anchors are not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt. 47 01 Safety 01 Top tether anchors Child restraint anchorages Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's instructions for information on securing the child seat. WARNING • Never route a top tether strap over the top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a collision occur. • Do not install rear speakers that require the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap. NOTE On models equipped with the optional cargo area cover, this cover should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors. Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are located on the rear side of the backrests. Securing a child seat 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. 2. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor. 3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is not equipped with lower tether straps, or the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a child restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt (see page 38). 4. Firmly tension all straps. 48 01 Safety Integrated booster cushion Integrated two-stage booster cushion*1 Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions are located in the outboard seating positions. These booster cushions have been specially designed to help safeguard children in the rear seat. They should be stowed (folded down into the seat cushion) when not in use. When using an integrated booster cushion, the child must be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt. in proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the child should be placed in a properly secured child restraint (see page 40). The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm. Use these booster cushions only with children whose weight is between: • Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg) • Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg) and whose height is between: • Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 – 140 cm) • Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm) Incorrect seating position: the child's head is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is not across the collarbone Before driving, check that: • The integrated two-stage booster cushion Correct seating position: child's head is below the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone In Canada, Transport Canada's weight recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg). The booster cushions are designed to raise the child higher, so that the shoulder strap crosses over the child's collarbone, not over the child's neck. If using a booster cushion does not result 1 01 is set in the correct position for according to the child's height and weight (see the table below) and is locked in position. Weight Height Stage 1 Stage 2 48 – 80 lbs 33 – 55 lbs 22 – 36 kg 15 – 25 kg 45 – 55 in. 37 – 47 in. 115 – 140 cm 95 – 120 cm Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49 01 Safety 01 Integrated booster cushion • That the seat belt is properly positioned and is taut. • The shoulder section of the seat belt is across the child's collarbone, not over the neck. • The lap section of the seat belt is across the child's hips and not the abdomen. Using an integrated booster cushion Stage 1 Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) to release the booster cushion. Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it in position. Stage 2 50 With the booster cushion in the stage 1 position, press the button (see the arrow in illustration 1). Lift the front edge of the booster cushion and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position. 01 Safety Integrated booster cushion Stowing the two-stage integrated booster cushion WARNING NOTE The booster cushion cannot be moved from the stage 2 (upper) position to the stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be folded down completely to the stowed position, and then adjusted to stage 1. Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. Press down on the center of the booster cushion to return it to the stowed position. NOTE The booster cushion must be in the stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down. CAUTION Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed. 01 DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table (see page 49). • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. The booster cushion can be folded down completely (stowed) from either the stage 1 or stage 2 positions. 51 01 Safety 01 Child safety locks G021077 Child safety locks Child safety locks – rear doors The controls are located on the rear door jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or a screwdriver to adjust these controls. The rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the slot is in the horizontal position. The rear doors can be opened from the inside when the slot is in the vertical position. 52 01 Safety 01 53 Remote key and key blade..................................................................... Keyless drive........................................................................................... Locks....................................................................................................... Alarm....................................................................................................... 54 56 63 66 69 LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade Introduction 02 Two remote keys or optional Personal Car Communicators (PCC) are provided with your vehicle. They enable you to unlock the doors and tailgate, and also function as ignition keys to start the vehicle or operate electrical components. The remote keys contain detachable metal key blades for manually locking or unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. Up to six remotes can be programmed for use on the same vehicle. The PCCs have enhanced functionality compared with the standard remote key. NOTE In the remainder of this chapter, all references to the remote key also pertain to the PCC unless otherwise stated. produced. This code is available at an authorized Volvo retailer. Loss of a remote key If either of the remote keys is lost, the other should be taken with the car to a Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost remote key must be erased from the system. Never leave the remote key in the ignition if children are to remain in the vehicle. Detachable key blade Each remote key or PCC contains a detachable metal key blade for mechanically locking or unlocking the driver's door and the glove compartment. See page 61 for more information on the key blade. The key blades have a unique code, which is used if new ones need to be 56 USA-5WK49264 FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO 5WK49236 FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266 NOTE Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any Authorized Volvo Retailer. You can also obtain additional or duplicate remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each key must be programmed to work with your vehicle. California Only: WARNING into Information Number of keys. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. A list of independent repair facilities and/or locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and code replacement keys can be found: FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233 FCC ID:KR55WK49233 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada-5WK49264 IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO 5WK49236 • on the Volvo website at http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 • by calling Volvo Customer Care at 1-800-458-1552 IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233 IC:267T-5WK49233 The number of registered keys for the vehicle can be found by pressing MY CAR and going Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Key memory: door mirrors and driver's seat The position of the side door mirrors and power driver's seat are stored in the remote keys when the vehicle is locked. The next time the driver's door is unlocked with the same remote key and the door is opened within 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the doors were most recently locked with the same remote key. See page 85 for more information. This feature can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle's menu by pressing MY CAR and going into Settings Car settings Car key memory. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. See also page 63 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive. Confirmation when locking/unlocking the vehicle Settings can be made in the menu system for audible and visual confirmation when the vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With these functions activated, the following will occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: Locking confirmation • The turn signals flash once, an audible signal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* in. Confirmation will only be given when all doors and the tailgate are properly closed and locked. NOTE If you do not receive confirmation when locking the vehicle, check whether a door or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has been turned off in the menu. Unlocking confirmation • The turn signals will flash twice and the door mirrors will fold* out. settings and select Audible confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. 02 Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle contains a coded transponder. The code in the key is transmitted to an antenna in the ignition slot where it is compared to the code stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehicle will start only with a properly coded key. If you misplace a key, take the other keys to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. The following messages (which may appear in the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer: Making a setting Different alternatives for locking/unlocking confirmation can be selected in the menus by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel. • To activate visual confirmation: go to Settings Car settings Light settings and select Door lock confirmation light and/or Unlock confirmation light by pressing OK/ MENU. • To activate audible confirmation: go to Settings Car settings Lock `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade Meaning Insert car key Remote key not recognized during start. Try to start the vehicle again. Car key not found PCC with keyless drive only. Remote key not recognized during start. Try to start the vehicle again. Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO If the problem continues, insert the remote key into the ignition slot and try to start the vehicle again. See page 112 for information on starting the vehicle. Immobilizer Try start again Remote key fault during start. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Replacing the battery in the remote key The batteries should be replaced if: • The information symbol illuminates and Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries. is shown in the display and/or if the locks do not react after several attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle. • CAUTION Never use force when inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot be started if the transponder is damaged. USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO 58 Common functions: Remote key/ Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* NOTE The remote key's range is normally approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle. See page 61 for information on replacing the battery. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. G021079 02 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following condition: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Message Personal Car Communicator (PCC)* Lock Unlock Approach lighting Tailgate unlock Panic alarm Buttons on the remote Lock – Press the Lock button on the remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. The turn signals will flash once to confirm locking. Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver's door. 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade This function can be changed so that all doors unlock at the same time by pressing My Car and going to Settings Car settings Lock settings Change doors unlock setting. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. Approach lighting – As you approach the vehicle, press the button on the remote key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, license plate lighting and the lights in the door mirrors*. These lights will switch off automatically after 30, 60 or 90 seconds. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice within several seconds to disarm the alarm system and optional movement sensor (the alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out), and unlock only the tailgate. Pressing this button for several seconds also opens the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate. NOTE NOTE As an added safety precaution, the parking lights will come on automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened. After closing, the tailgate will not automatically relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the alarm. Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of the remote key. The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with the key blade, see page 61. 02 Unique functions—PCC* See also the section "Unlocking the tailgate from the passenger compartment." Panic alarm – This button can be used to attract attention during emergency situations. To activate the panic alarm, press and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and horn will be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds and press the button again. The Panic alarm button will not unlock the vehicle. Range The remote key has a range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. G021080 After a short pause, press the Unlock button a second time within 10 seconds to unlock the other doors and the tailgate. Information button Indicator lights Pressing the information button provides certain information about the vehicle with the help of the indicator lights. Using the information button 1. Press the information button . `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade 02 2. All of the indicator lights will flash sequentially for approximately 7 seconds to indicate that the PCC is receiving information from the vehicle. If any of the buttons are pressed during this 7-second period, transmission of information to the PCC will be interrupted. NOTE NOTE If none of the indicator lights flash when the information button has been pressed several times from different places in relation to the vehicle, contact an authorized Volvo service technician. The indicator lights provide information according to the illustration: Steady green light: the vehicle is correctly locked. The approach lighting, panic alarm, and the functions controlled by the information button have a range of approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle. • Radio waves, buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of the PCC. If the vehicle does not provide confirmation when a button has been pressed, try moving closer and pressing the button again. Outside of the PCC´s range Range If the PCC is more than approximately 300 ft (100 m) from the vehicle when the information button is pressed, no new information will be received. The PCC most recently used to lock or unlock the vehicle will show the vehicle's most recently received status. The indicator lights will not flash when the information button is pressed while the PCC is out of range. The PCC's lock and unlock functions have a range of approximately 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. If more than one PCC is used to lock/unlock the vehicle, only the one used most recently will show the correct locking status. Steady yellow light: the vehicle is not locked. Steady red light: the alarm has been triggered. Both red lights flash alternatively: the alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago. 60 • 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade NOTE wise approximately one-quarter turn to unlock the driver's door only. Removing the key blade If none of the indicator lights illuminate when the information button is pressed, this may be because the most recent transmission between the vehicle and the PCC was interrupted or impeded by buildings or other objects. 02 NOTE After unlocking the driver's door with the key blade, opening the door will trigger the alarm. To disable the alarm: Vehicles equipped with the optional Personal Car Communicator have the keyless drive function, see page 63 for detailed information. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot. This also applies to vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive. G021082 Keyless drive Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. Detachable key blade The key blade can be removed from the remote key. When removed, the key blade can be used to: • Lock/unlock the driver's door if the remote key is not functioning properly • Lock/unlock the glove compartment (see page 67) • Block access to the glove compartment Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. Reinserting the key blade in the remote key Replacing batteries in the remote key/ PCC The battery/batteries in the remote key/PCC should be replaced if: • The information symbol lights up and a text appears in the information display. 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. and/or 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. • the vehicle's locks repeatedly do not react 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. when a button on the remote key/PCC is pressed within approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehicle. Unlocking the doors with the detached key blade Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade clock`` 61 02 Locks and alarm Remote key and key blade Opening the remote key/PCC 02 PCC (two batteries) Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old batteries. Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. 2. Insert the first new battery with the (+) side upward. Insert a small screwdriver in the hole behind the spring loaded catch and carefully pry up the cover. 3. Insert the plastic spacer over the battery. Insert the second new battery on top of the plastic spacer, with the + side downward. Re-assembling the remote key NOTE Turn the remote key with the buttons upward so that the batteries do not fall out when the cover is removed. Replacing the batteries CAUTION When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key. Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) sides. Remote key (one battery) Battery type CR 2430, 3 V (one battery in the remote key, two batteries in the PCC) 62 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery. 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward. 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. 3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. Old batteries should be properly recycled. 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive Keyless drive* (models with Personal Car Communicator only) NOTE • Keyless locking and unlocking • The gear selector must in the P position before the vehicle can be locked and the alarm can be armed. The buttons on the keyless drive remote key can also be used to lock and unlock the vehicle, see page 58 for more information. Both of the PCCs provided with the vehicle have the keyless function, and additional ones can be ordered. The system can accommodate up to six PCCs. Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft (1.5 meters) This system makes it possible to unlock and lock the vehicle without having to press any buttons on the Personal Car Communicators (PCC). It is only necessary to have a keyless drive remote key in your possession to operate the central locking system. Lock settings Keyless entry. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. 02 NOTE If the PCC does not function normally (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade, see page 61. Locking or unlocking the vehicle with the key blade The red rings in the illustration indicate the area around the vehicle that is within range of the keyless drive antennas. Unlocking the vehicle • A keyless drive remote key must be on the same side of the vehicle as the door to be opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tailgate (see the shaded areas in the illustration). • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door or pull the tailgate opening control. The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the vehicle's menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings Keyless drive keyhole cover The driver's door on vehicles equipped with keyless drive can be locked or unlocked with the remote key's detachable key blade if necessary, see page 61 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. To access the keyhole in the driver's door: `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive 02 1. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover. > The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward. 2. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to unlock the driver's door only. This will trigger the alarm. Press the remote key into the ignition slot to turn off the alarm. 3. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked. Locking the vehicle The doors and the tailgate can be locked by pressing the lock button in any of the outside door handles. NOTE On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked. Keyless drive remote key and driver's seat/door mirror memory • When you leave the vehicle with a PCC in your possession and lock any door, the position of the driver's seat and door mirrors will be stored in the seat's memory. • The next time a door is opened by a person with the same PCC in his/her possession, the driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position that they were in when the door was most recently locked. NOTE Models with keyless drive have a button on the outside door handles 64 If several people carrying PCCs approach the vehicle at the same time, the driver's seat and door mirrors will assume the positions they were in for the person who opens the driver's door. See also page 85 for information on adjusting and storing the seat's position in the seat memory. Keyless drive information messages If all of the PCCs are removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition is in mode II (see page 82) and all of the doors are closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel display and an audible signal will sound. When at least one PCC has been returned to the car, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop when: • A door has been opened and closed • The PCC has been inserted in the ignition slot • The READ button (see page 131 for the location of this button) has been pressed. 02 Locks and alarm Keyless drive • • CAUTION For Automobile Use Keyless drive remote keys should never be left in the vehicle. In the event of a break-in, a remote found in the vehicle could make it possible to start the engine. Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 Electromagnetic fields or metal obstructions can interfere with the keyless drive system. Avoid placing the remote key near cellular phones, metallic objects or e.g., in a metal briefcase. The keyless drive system has a number of antennas located at various points in the vehicle. On the tailgate, near the wiper motor NOTE This device complies with RSS -210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, KR55WK48964 NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 02 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Location of the keyless drive antennas Left rear door handle Ceiling, above the center of the rear seat Under the floor of the cargo area, near the rear seat Right rear door handle Under the rear section of the center console Under the front section of the center console. WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless drive system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless drive system. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 5WK48891 G021179 Siemens VDO Tested To Comply With FCC Standards 65 02 Locks and alarm Locks Locking and unlocking the vehicle 02 From outside the vehicle From inside the vehicle (central locking button) • Press the lock button after the front doors have been closed. The remote key locks and unlocks all of the doors and the tailgate. • Each door can be locked individually with Before the vehicle can be locked from the outside with the remote key, the driver's door must be closed. Any other door/tailgate that is open will be locked and the alarm will be armed. Alternative locking when parking the lock button on the respective doors. The door must be closed first. The central locking button on the driver's door can also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave it. To do so: NOTE Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must be closed before the vehicle can be locked. The first press on the unlock button unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the tailgate (see also page 58). This setting can be changed in the menu system, see page 134. If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the batteries in the remote, see page 58. In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. See page 61. 66 Locking 1. Open the door. 2. Press the lock section of the button. Central locking button The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. Press to lock and to unlock. Unlocking The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the vehicle in two ways: • By pressing the unlock button . • The door can be unlocked by pulling the door handle once and opened by pulling the handle again. 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm. NOTE Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on the remote key. If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, be sure that the remote key is in your possession before closing the door. 02 Locks and alarm Locks Automatic relocking If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will rearm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened. Automatic locking When the vehicle starts to move, the doors and tailgate can be locked automatically. This feature can be turned on or off by pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock settings Automatic door locking. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. The glove compartment can only be locked and unlocked using the detachable key blade in the remote key. See page 61 for information on removing the key blade from the remote key. Unlocking the tailgate with the remote key Press the tailgate unlock button on the remote key to unlock (but not open1) the tailgate. See also page 58. > The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle. The accessory movement and inclination sensors will be automatically disconnected. Insert the key blade in the glove compartment lock. Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. Remove the key blade from the lock. Locking/unlocking the tailgate 02 NOTE • If the doors are locked while the tailgate is open, the tailgate will remain unlocked until the vehicle is relocked by pressing the Lock button on the remote key. • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all doors and the tailgate must be closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked. Glove compartment Tailgate unlock button on the remote key 1 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 271). `` 67 02 Locks and alarm Locks 02 Unlocking the tailgate from the passenger compartment Press the button on the lighting panel (1) to unlock (but not open1) the tailgate. NOTE Opening the tailgate manually The tailgate is held closed by an electronic locking mechanism. To open: 1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate under the handle to release the lock. 2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate. The taillights will illuminate automatically for a short period when the tailgate has been opened. CAUTION • When pressing the rubberized plate, only light pressure is necessary to release the tailgate's electronic locking mechanism. • When opening the tailgate, pull it up using the handle. Too much pressure on the rubberized plate can damage its electrical connections. Locking the tailgate with the remote key Press the lock button ( also page 58 ) on the remote. See The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and that the alarm has been armed. 1 68 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (see page 271). 02 Locks and alarm Alarm The alarm system The alarm is automatically armed whenever the vehicle is locked with the remote key or optional Personal Car Communicator. Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle. Arming the alarm Press the Lock button on the remote key. One long flash of the turn signals will confirm that the alarm is armed. The hood is forced open. Alarm confirmation settings can be changed in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. The tailgate is forced open. USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) When armed, the alarm continuously monitors a number of points on the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm: • • • • • NOTE The alarm indicator light A door is forced open. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The ignition slot is tampered with. An attempt is made to start the vehicle with a non-approved key (a key not coded to the car's ignition). • If there is movement in the passenger compartment (if the vehicle is equipped with the accessory movement sensor). Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) • The vehicle is lifted or towed (if the vehicle is equipped with the accessory inclination sensor). • The battery is disconnected (while the alarm is armed). • The siren is disconnected when the alarm is disarmed. A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 02 The status of the alarm system is indicated by the red indicator light on the dashboard (see illustration): • Indicator light off – the alarm is not armed • The indicator light flashes at one-second Movement sensor DA5823 by Dynex Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. intervals – the alarm is armed • The indicator light flashes rapidly before the remote key is inserted in the ignition slot and the ignition is put in mode I—the alarm has been triggered. `` 69 02 Locks and alarm Alarm 02 Disarming the alarm Remote key not functioning Reduced alarm function If the remote key is not functioning properly, the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows: Turning off the accessory alarm sensors Press the Unlock button on the remote key. > Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been deactivated and that all doors are unlocked. Turning off (stopping) the alarm 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade (see page 61 for information on detaching the key blade). > This will trigger the alarm. If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by pressing the Unlock button on the remote key or by inserting the remote key in the ignition slot. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm has been turned off. The vehicle's menu system is used for turning off these sensors (see page 133 for a description of the menu system). 1. Go into the menu under Car settings. 2. Select Reduced Guard (Press OK/ MENU to choose). Other alarm-related functions 3. Two alternatives are now available: • Activate once. If this alternative is Automatic re-arming If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened. Audible/visual alarm signal 2. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot (also on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). This will turn off the alarm. • An audible alarm signal is given by a bat- 3. Start the engine. tery powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for 30 seconds. • The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off. 70 In certain situations it may be desirable to turn off the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors if, for example, you drive your vehicle onto a ferry where the rocking of the boat could trigger the alarm or if a pet is left in the vehicle with the doors locked. selected, Reduced guard See manual will appear in the instrument panel display and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be deactivated when the vehicle is locked. • Ask when exiting. If this alternative is selected, a message will appear in the center console display each time the engine is turned off. Press OK/MENU to accept and the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be 02 Locks and alarm Alarm deactivated when the vehicle is locked. Press EXIT to cancel. 4. Press OK/MENU and lock the vehicle. 02 The next time the engine is started, the alarm system will be reset and Full guard will appear in the instrument panel display. The accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors will be reactivated. In either of the alternatives, if you prefer not to deactivate the accessory inclination and movement alarm sensors, do not make a choice in the menu or press EXIT and lock the vehicle. 71 Instruments and controls........................................................................ 74 Ignition modes........................................................................................ 82 Seats....................................................................................................... 84 Steering wheel........................................................................................ 90 Lighting................................................................................................... 92 Wipers and washers................................................................................ 98 Power windows..................................................................................... 101 Mirrors................................................................................................... 103 Compass*.............................................................................................. 105 Laminated panoramic roof*................................................................... 106 HomeLink® Wireless Control System*.................................................. Starting the engine................................................................................ Transmission......................................................................................... Brakes................................................................................................... Parking brake........................................................................................ Hill Descent Control (HDC)*.................................................................. 72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 112 116 119 122 125 YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Instrument overview 03 74 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Function Page Function Page Function Page Menus and messages, turn signals, high/low beams, trip computer 133, 95, 92, 147 101, 103, 52, 66 Lighting panel, controls for opening fuel filler door/tailgate 92, 268, 67 Cruise control 152 In-door control panels (power windows, mirrors, power child safety locks, central locking button) Power seat* adjustment controls 84 Horn, airbag 91, 22 Hazard warning flashers 94 Main instrument panel 75 Audio system controls 204 Audio system/Bluetooth hands-free controls 204, 233 Climate system controls 142 START/STOP ENGINE button 82 Gear selector 116 82 Controls for active chassis (Four-C)* 151 Ignition slot Infotainment/menu display - Wipers and washers 98, 99 – Steering wheel adjustment 90 Door handle Hood opening control 317 Parking brake 122 03 Information displays Information displays in the instrument panel The information displays show information on some of the vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls in the red area of the gauge. The engine management system will automatically prevent excessively high engines speeds. This will be noticeable as a pronounced unevenness in engine speed. More detailed information can be found in the descriptions of the functions that use the information displays. Gauges 03 Indicator, information, and warning symbols When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the function check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the vehicle's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may not have their functions illustrated, depending on the vehicle's equipment. Indicator and information symbols Symbol Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system Gauges in the instrument panel Speedometer 76 Description Malfunction indicator light Fuel gauge. Please note that the fuel level indicator in the gauge moves from right to left as the amount of fuel in the tank decreases. The arrow indicates the side of the vehicle that the fuel filler door is on. See also the section on refueling beginning on page 266. See page 147 for more information on fuel level and consumption. Indicator and warning symbols The tachometer shows engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not drive continuously with the needle Function check High beam and turn signal indicators Indicator and warning symbols Anti-lock brake system (ABS) Rear fog light on Information symbols Indicator and warning symbols All indicator and warning symbols light up in ignition mode II or when the engine is started. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Stability system Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS) 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Symbol condition that potentially may need correcting. When this happens, please have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. If the warning light remains on, the vehicle should be driven to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection, see page 119 for additional information. Canadian models are equipped with this symbol. Right turn signal indicator A malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light may have many causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a change in your car's behavior. Even so, an uncorrected condition could hurt fuel economy, emission controls, and drivability. Extended driving without correcting the cause could even damage other components in your vehicle. The stability system's Sport mode is activated. This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine was running while the vehicle was refueled. Description Low fuel level Information symbol, see text in information display High beam indicator Left turn signal indicator Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL) system This symbol will illuminate if the there is a fault in the ABL system. See page 93 for more information about this system. Malfunction Indicator Light As you drive, a computer called On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's engine, transmission, electrical and emission systems. The malfunction indicator (CHECK ENGINE) light will illuminate if the computer senses a Canadian models are equipped with this symbol. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light If the warning light comes on, there may be a malfunction in the ABS system (the standard braking system will still function). Check the system by: 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off the ignition. 2. Restart the engine. 3. If the warning light goes off, no further action is required. 03 Rear fog light This symbol indicates that the rear fog light (located in the driver's side tail light cluster) is on. Stability system This indicator symbol flashes when the DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system) is actively working to stabilize the vehicle, see page 149 for more detailed information. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)* This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire pressure in one or more tires is low, see page 309 for detailed information. Low fuel level When this light comes on, the vehicle should be refueled as soon as possible. See page 266 for information about fuel and refueling. Information symbol The information symbol lights up and a text message is displayed to provide the driver with `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 03 necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be erased and the symbol can be turned off by pressing the READ button (see page 131 for information) or this will take place automatically after a short time (the length of time varies, depending on the function affected). The information symbol may also illuminate together with other symbols. High beam indicator This symbol illuminates when the high beam headlights are on, or if the high beam flash function is used. Left turn signal indicator example when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand. Indicator and warning symbols Symbol Description Low oil pressure Parking brake applied Canadian models are equipped with this symbol. Seat belt reminder See page 122 for more information about using the parking brake. Generator not charging Fault in the brake system NOTE Both turn signal indicators will flash when the hazard warning flashers are used. • If either of these indicators flash faster than normal, the direction indicators are not functioning properly. Sport mode This symbol illuminates to indicate that the stability system's Sport mode has been activated to help provide maximum tractive force, for 78 A flashing symbol means that a fault has been detected. See the message in the information display. SRS airbags Right turn signal indicator • Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. On models equipped with the electric parking brake, this symbol flashes while the brake is being applied and then glows steadily. Warning symbol Low oil pressure If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. If the oil level is normal and the light stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo service technician. This is normal, provided it goes off when the engine speed is increased. Airbags – SRS If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on for longer than approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started, the SRS system's diagnostic functions have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. See page 21 for more information about the airbag system. 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Seat belt reminder This symbol comes on for approximately 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt. Generator not charging This symbol comes on during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Engine temperature Engine overheating can result from low oil or coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. Engine overheating will be signaled with text and a red warning triangle in the middle of the instrument display. The exact text will depend on the degree of overheating. It may range from High engine temp Reduce speed to High engine temp Stop engine. If appropriate, other messages, such as Coolant level low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If your engine does overheat so that you must stop the engine, always allow the engine to cool before attempting to check oil and coolant levels. See page 320 for more information. Fault in brake system If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 320. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked. WARNING • Canadian models are equipped with this symbol. If the and symbols come on at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine. • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a warning message is displayed in the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. 03 If the ABS and Brake system lights are on at the same time, there is a risk of reduced vehicle stability. 2. Restart the engine. • If both symbols extinguish, continue driving. • If the symbols remain on, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 320. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, with great care, to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked. • If the level in the reservoir is below MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked. Warning symbol The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 131. The warning symbol can also come on in conjunction with other symbols. Action: 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the vehicle further. 2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using READ. `` 79 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Reminder – doors not closed 03 If one of the doors, the hood or tailgate is not closed properly, the information or warning symbol comes on together with an explanatory text message in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door, hood or tailgate. If the vehicle is driven at a speed lower than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the information symbol comes on. If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol comes on. Odometer display Button for toggling between T1 and T2, and for resetting the odometer The trip odometers are used to measure short distances. A short press the button toggles between the two trip odometers T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip odometer to zero. The distance is shown in the display. Clock Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise to set the time. The set time is shown in the information display. The clock may be temporarily replaced by a symbol in conjunction with a message, see page 131. Setting the clock in MY CAR In addition to setting the clock manually as described above, it can also be set in the MY CAR menu system. See page 133 for additional information about these menus. Trip odometers Clock and setting control Display Control for setting the clock Trip odometers and reset button 80 1. Go to Settings Time. System options 2. The hour box will be selected. Press OK to activate this box. 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls 3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box. 4. Turn TUNE to select the minute box (A) and press OK to activate this box (B). 5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK to confirm the setting and deactivate this box. 03 6. Turn TUNE to select OK and press OK to complete the procedure. Use the menu selection Settings System options Time format to display the time in the 24-hour format or the 12-hour format (AM/ PM). 81 03 Your driving environment Ignition modes Inserting and removing the remote key Removing the remote key Returning to mode 0 from mode I The remote key can be removed from the ignition slot by pulling it out. Open the driver's door. Ignition mode functions Ignition modes Ignition mode 0 03 Insert the remote key in the ignition slot and press it in as far as possible1. Ignition mode I The various ignition modes are accessed with the remote key in the ignition slot1. Position 0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. The infotainment system can be used. I Laminated panoramic roof, power windows,12-volt sockets, navigation system*, climate system blower, ECC, windshield wipers can be used. II The headlights/taillights come on. Warning/indicator lights come on for 5 seconds. All equipment operates apart from heated seats* and rear window defroster, which only work when the engine is running. NOTE Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP ENGINE button. To access ignition modes I or II without starting the engine, the brake pedal must not be depressed. Inserting the remote key1 Holding the end of the remote key with the base of the key blade, insert the remote key into the ignition slot as shown in the illustration and press it in as far as possible (past the detent). CAUTION With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly. Ignition mode II Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair function or cause damage. With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds. Returning to mode I from mode II With the remote key fully pressed into the ignition slot1, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly. 1 82 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Function 03 Your driving environment Ignition modes Starting and stopping the engine See page 112 for information on starting the engine and switching it off. Emergency towing See page 282 for more information. 03 83 03 Your driving environment Seats Front seats • 03 • WARNING Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest. Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. Without releasing the catches, push the backrest forward. Check that the seat is securely locked into position after adjusting. Folding the front seat backrest Lumbar support: turn the control for firmer or softer lumbar support. Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and move the seat to the position of your choice. Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. Control panel for power seat*. The front passenger seat backrest can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: Move the seat as far back and down as possible. Adjust the backrest to an upright position. 84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Move the seat as far forward as possible so that the head restraint slides under the glove compartment. WARNING • When transporting long objects, cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. • When the seat's backrest is returned to the upright position, push and pull it to be sure that it is securely locked in this position. 03 Your driving environment Seats Power seat* Three different seating and door mirror positions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. • Only one of the power seat's controls can be used at the same time. • The power seats have an overload protector that activates if a seat is blocked by any object. If this occurs, switch off the ignition (key in position 0) and wait for a short period before operating the seat again. Seat with memory function The following example explains how button (1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) are programmed in the same way. 03 To program (store) a seat position and door mirror position in button (1): 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the desired position using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. 2. Press and hold down the memory button (4). Front edge of seat cushion up/down Seat forward/rearward and up/down 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors. Backrest tilt Operation The seats can be adjusted for a short period after unlocking the door with the remote control without the key in the ignition slot. Seat adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made when the engine is running. Programming the memory NOTE To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was programmed: Stored seat position Stored seat position Stored seat position Press and hold down button (1) until the seat and mirrors stop moving. NOTE As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released before the seat has reached the preset position. Memory button `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85 03 Your driving environment Seats Remote keyless entry system and the driver's seat and door mirrors1 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same remote control (the one used to lock the doors). Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the buttons to stop the seat. 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically move to the position in which you left them. 03 NOTE The remote control transmitter also controls the position of the power driver's seat and door mirrors in the following way: • The key memory is independent of the seat memory. • The seat will move to this position even if someone else has moved it to a different seating position and locked the vehicle with a different remote control. • This feature will work in the same way with all of the remote control transmitters that you use with your vehicle. 1. Adjust the seat to your preferences. 2. When you leave your vehicle, lock it using the remote control. The position of the driver's seat and door mirrors is now stored in the remote control's memory. Automatic seat/mirror adjustment To move the seat and door mirrors to the position in which you left them: 1 86 The function can be activated/deactivated under MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory Position of door mirrors and driver's seat in key. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. See page 64 for information regarding vehicles with the optional keyless drive. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WARNING • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • The seat rails on the floor must not be obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion. Heated seats* See page 143. 03 Your driving environment Seats Rear seats Rear center head restraint The center head restraint should be adjusted according to the passenger's height. The restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head. Manually folding down the rear seat's outboard head restraints • Pull the head restraint up as required. • To lower, press and hold the button 03 (located at the center, between the backrest and the head restraint) while pressing the head restrain down. WARNING The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the uppermost point of the seat occupant's ear. • Pull the handle closest to the head restraint to fold it down. • To return the head restraint to the upright position, push it up until it clicks into place. NOTE • The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually. • The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button. `` 87 03 Your driving environment Seats CAUTION The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery. 03 WARNING For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position. Automatically folding down the rear seat’s outboard head restraints 2. Press the button to lower the rear head restraints for improved visibility. NOTE • The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually. • The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button. CAUTION The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in leather upholstery. WARNING Folding down the rear seat backrests 88 down separately. • The center section can be folded down For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position. 1. The ignition must be in mode I or II. • The left (driver's side) section can be folded The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations to make it easier to transport long objects. separately. • The right (passenger's side) section can only be folded down together with the center section. • All three sections can be folded down together. CAUTION To help avoid damage to the upholstery, there should be no objects on the rear seat and the seat belt should not be buckled when the backrest is folded down. 03 Your driving environment Seats WARNING Release and lower the center head restraint (see page 87) if the center and/or right section of the backrest is to be lowered. The outboard head restraints fold down automatically. Pull up the backrest release control on the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the section(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows that the backrest is not locked in the upright position. NOTE It may be necessary to move the front seats forward or put their backrests in a more upright position before folding down the rear seat backrests. • When one or more sections of the backrest is returned to the upright position, check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible. • Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position. • Long loads should always be securely anchored to help avoid injury in the event of a sudden stop. • Always turn the engine off and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading the vehicle. • Place the transmission in the Park (P) position to help prevent inadvertent movement of the gear selector. • On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. 03 89 03 Your driving environment Steering wheel Adjusting WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted, see page 151. 03 G021138 Unlocking/locking Adjusting the steering wheel Lever for releasing/locking the steering wheel Possible positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach: 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you. 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to push into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever. Unlocking 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition slot as far as possible. 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button. > A sound will be audible when the lock releases. 2. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot. 3. Open the driver's door. > A sound will be audible when the steering wheel lock engages. Vehicles with keyless drive* 1. Switch off the engine (see page 114 for details). 2. Open the driver's door. > A sound will be audible when the steering wheel lock engages. Keypads Vehicles with keyless drive* A remote key must be in the passenger compartment or cargo compartment (but not inserted into the ignition slot) Press the START/STOP ENGINE button. > A sound will be audible when the steering wheel lock releases. Locking 1. Switch off the engine (see page 114 for details). Keypads in the steering wheel Cruise control, see page 152. Adaptive cruise control*, see page 154. Infotainment controls, see page 207. 90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment Steering wheel Horn 03 Horn Press the steering wheel hub to sound the horn. 91 03 Your driving environment Lighting Lighting panel High/low beam headlights High/low beam headlights Continuous high beams 1. Set the ignition to mode II. 2. With the light switch in position 0 or , pull the turn signal lever toward the steering wheel to position 2 to toggle between high and low beams (this also applies on models equipped with the optional Active Bending Lights). > The symbol illuminates in the 03 Overview, light switches Thumb wheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting Rear fog light Headlights/parking lights Headlight switch and lever High beam flash Toggle between high and low beams Daytime running lights/high beams/high beam flash Instrument lighting Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary, depending on ignition mode. Parking lights The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel. Low beams/high beams/high beam flash The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumb wheel. 92 High beam flash Move the lever toward the steering wheel to position 1. The high beams come on until the lever is released. instrument panel to indicate that the high beams are on. Low beams When the engine is started, the low beams are activated automatically (daytime running lights) if the headlight control is in position 0 or . Daytime running lights can be deactivated in the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings Light settings Daytime running lights. However, please be aware that these lights may not be deactivated in Canada. 03 Your driving environment Lighting NOTE • The use of daytime running lights is mandatory in Canada. • Continuous high beams cannot be activated when the headlight switch is in position . High beam flash will function in this position. Active Bending Lights (ABL)* ABL is activated automatically1 when the engine is started. Symbol The function can be deactivated/reactivated in the MY CAR menu system under My XC60 Active Bending Lights or under Settings Car settings Light settings Active Bending Lights. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. NOTE This function is only active in twilight or dark conditions, and only when the vehicle is in motion. Display Explanation Headlamp failure Service required The system is not functioning properly and should be inspected/ repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 03 If a fault should occur in the system, the symbol will illuminate and a message will be displayed as shown in the table. Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated (left) and activated (right) When this function is activated, the headlight beams adjust laterally to help light up a curve according to movements of the steering wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the illustration). 1 The factory default setting is on. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Your driving environment Lighting Parking lights Rear fog light NOTE The rear fog light is considerably brighter than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters). 03 Hazard warning flashers Headlight control in position for parking lights The parking lights (the license plate lights also come on) can be turned on even when the ignition is switched off. Turn the headlight control to the center position (the license plate lighting comes on at the same time). The lighting also comes on when the tailgate is opened in order to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle. The single rear fog light is located in the driver's side taillight cluster. The rear fog light will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights. Press the button to switch the rear fog light on/off. > The rear fog light indicator symbol on the instrument panel and the light in the button come on when the rear fog light is switched on. Location of the hazard warning flasher button The hazard warning flasher should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard. 94 To activate the flashers, press the button in the center dash. Press the button again to turn off the flashers. 03 Your driving environment Lighting • Regulations regarding the use of the hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live. • The hazard warning flashers will be activated automatically if an airbag deploys. Turn signals When turning Interior lighting, front Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned to its initial position by hand. 03 NOTE • This automatic flashing sequence can be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb. G021149 NOTE Light switches, front roof lighting Drivers side front reading light, on/off Passenger's side front reading light, on/off Overhead courtesy lighting. The lighting in the front part of the passenger compartment is controlled with the buttons (1) and (2) in the roof console. Turn signals When changing lanes The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever up or down to the first position and releasing it. Switch (3) has three positions for all passenger compartment lighting: • Off: right side depressed, automatic lighting off. • Neutral position: automatic lighting is on. • On – left side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on. `` 95 03 Your driving environment Lighting Interior lighting, rear 03 Overhead courtesy lighting Home safe lighting The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically when button (3) is in the neutral position. When you leave your vehicle at night, you can make use of the home safe lighting function to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if: 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot. • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with the key or remote control • the engine is switched off and the ignition is in mode 0. The lighting switches off when: Rear reading lights The lights are switched on or off by pressing each respective button. Courtesy lights/door step lighting* The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch on/off automatically when one of the front doors is opened/closed. Glove compartment lighting The glove compartment lighting switches on/ off automatically when the lid is opened/ closed. • the engine is started • the vehicle is locked from the outside. The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open. The passenger compartment lighting can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes after the vehicle has been unlocked. If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will switch off automatically after one minute. Cargo area lighting The cargo area lighting comes on automatically when the tailgate is opened. 2 96 Factory setting * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible towards the steering wheel and release it. 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. The headlights, parking lights, turn signals, lights in the door mirrors, license plate lights, and footwell lighting will illuminate and remain on for 30 2, 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be set in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. Approach lighting Approach lighting is activated by pressing the approach light button on the remote key (see the illustration on page 58). When the function has been activated, the parking lights, indicator lights, door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome lighting and door step lighting come on. 03 Your driving environment Lighting The time interval for this lighting can be set by pressing MY CAR and going to Car settings Light settings Approach light duration. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. 03 97 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washers Windshield wipers/washers Windshield wipers off Move the lever to position 0 to switch off the windshield wipers. Single sweep Move the lever upward from position 0 to sweep the windshield one stroke at a time for as long as the lever is held up. 03 Intermittent wiping Windshield wipers and washers Rain sensor* on/off With the lever in this position, you can set the wiper interval by twisting the thumb wheel upward to increase wiper speed or downward to decrease the speed. Continuous wiping The wipers operate at normal speed. Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency The wipers operate at high speed. CAUTION • • 98 Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation. Before using the wipers, ice and snow should be removed from the windshield/rear window. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place. Windshield wiper service position The windshield wipers must be in the service position before the wiper blades can be cleaned or replaced. See page 329 for additional information. Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper speed according to the amount of water on the windshield. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted moving the thumb wheel up * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. (the wipers will sweep the windshield more frequently) or down (the wipers will sweep the windshield less frequently). NOTE The wipers will make an extra sweep each time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward. When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle must be running or in ignition mode II and the windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 or in the single sweep position. Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button . The windshield wipers will make one sweep. Press the lever up for the wipers to make an extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active mode when the stalk is released back to position 0. Deactivating Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the butor press the lever down to another ton wiper position. 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washers The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the key is removed from the ignition slot or five minutes after the ignition has been switched off. CAUTION The rain sensor should be deactivated when washing the car in an automatic car wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the car wash and could be damaged. Windshield washing After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps. Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing. High-pressure headlight washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlights are washed using two alternatives: • Low/high beam headlights on. The headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed within a 10-minute period. ing Lights will be washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Normal halogen headlights will not be washed. CAUTION Move the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers. 03 High-pressure headlight washing* • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- Washing function Tailgate wiper/washer Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation. Move the lever forward to start the tailgate washer. Intermittent wiping Normal (continuous) wiping NOTE The rear wiper is equipped with cut-off function, which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will function again after a cool-down period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat of the motor and ambient temperature conditions). `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Your driving environment Wipers and washers Tailgate wiper and reverse gear IR-reflecting windshield* If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will go into intermittent wiping function1. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected. For best performance, place the device on the section of the windshield without the IR coating (see the area marked in the illustration). 03 NOTE On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining. If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous) wiping mode, selecting different gears will not affect its function. Section of the windshield where the IR-coating is not applied Dimensions A 1.9 in. (47 mm) B 3.4 in. (87 mm) An optional factory-installed infrared (IR) coating can be applied to the windshield to help protect the cabin from the sun's heat and the fading effect of sunlight on upholstery, panels, etc. Electronic equipment such as garage door openers, electronic toll tags and similar devi1 100 ces should not be placed on sections of the windshield with the IR coating because this could affect their function and limit their range. Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment Power windows Power windows Operating NOTE • Movement of the windows will stop if they are obstructed in any way. • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the front windows slightly. 03 Manual up/down Driver's door control panel Switch for power child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons, see page 52 Rear window controls Front window controls. WARNING • Always remove the ignition key when the vehicle is unattended. • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. • Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are operated. Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position. Auto up/down Operating the power windows Manual up/down Auto up/down. Move one of the controls up/down as far as possible and release it. > The window will open or close completely. All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors. Resetting For the power windows to function, the ignition must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has been running, the power windows can be operated for several minutes after the remote key has been removed from the ignition slot, or until a door has been opened. 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one second. If the battery has been disconnected, the auto open function must be reset so that it will work properly. 2. Release the button briefly. 3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Your driving environment Power windows Laminated glass* This glass is reinforced to help provide protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. 03 102 The windshield, laminated panoramic roof and other windows have laminated glass. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment Mirrors Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces: 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the same time. 2. Release them after approximately one second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position. Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position. Door mirror controls Storing the position* Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror or the R button for the right door mirror. The light in the button comes on. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the center. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be on. WARNING Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are. The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the vehicle has been locked with the remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with the same remote control the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened. The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory Position of door mirrors and driver's seat in key. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. Tilting the door mirrors when parking* The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. To activate this function, select reverse gear and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the mirror down. The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt right mirror. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. 03 The door mirror will reset to its normal position: • after 10 seconds when reverse is disengaged and the car remains stopped. • immediately when reverse is disengaged and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). • immediately if you press the corresponding L or R button again. • when the engine is turned off. • when the side mirrors are folded in. NOTE Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time. Automatically tilting the door mirrors when parking The door mirrors can tilt down automatically to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. When the transmission is no longer in `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 03 Your driving environment Mirrors reverse, the mirrors will automatically return to their original position. 03 This function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right mirror. See page 133 for information about the MY CAR menu system. Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors comes on when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected, see page 96. Interior rearview mirror Rear window and door mirror defrosters When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended. The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors when locking. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. Resetting to neutral • Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons. • Fold them out again with the L and R buttons. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. 104 Auto-dim function An integrated sensor reacts to headlights from following traffic and automatically reduces glare in the mirror. Automatic retraction when locking Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be electrically reset to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work. Settings Climate settings Automatic rear defroster. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. Use the defroster to quickly remove fog and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors. Press the button once to start simultaneous rear window and door mirror defrosting. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch the function off when then windows have cleared to help avoid battery drain. The rear window is defogged/de-iced automatically if the vehicle is started in an outside temperature lower than 48 °F (9 °C). Autodefrosting can be selected in MY CAR under 03 Your driving environment Compass* Operation netic zone. The character C is shown in the mirror's display if calibration is necessary. 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely out of traffic and away from steel structures and high-tension electrical wires. Selecting a magnetic zone 1 2 15 14 3 2. Start the vehicle. 03 13 4 NOTE Rearview mirror with compass. The rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the vehicle is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with the abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). The compass is displayed automatically when the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To switch the compass on/off use a pen or similar object and press in the button on the underside of the mirror. Calibration The compass may need to be calibrated if, for example, the vehicle is driven into a new mag- 12 3. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the underside of mirror until C is shown again in the mirror(after approx. 6 seconds). 4. Drive as usual. C disappears from the display when calibration is complete. Alternative calibration method: Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 5 mph (8 km/h) until C disappears from the display when calibration is complete. 8 5 9 6 7 11 10 G018632 For best results from calibration, switch off all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio system, etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed. Magnetic zones. The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The correct zone must be selected for the compass to work correctly. 1. Put the ignition in mode II. 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror for at least 3 seconds. The number for the current area will be shown. 3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area (1 – 15) is shown. 4. The display will revert to showing the compass direction after several seconds. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 03 Your driving environment Laminated panoramic roof* Introduction The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two sections. • The rear glass section is fixed in place and cannot be moved. 03 Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade are operated by the controls in the ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II before the laminated panoramic roof/sun shade can be operated. Operation • The front glass section can be slid horizontally to the open or closed positions or its rear edge can be raised and lowered to allow ventilation. All references in this section to opening or closing the panoramic roof pertain to the front glass section. The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun shade made of perforated fabric that is located below the sections of glass. This shade can be opened or closed, for example when driving in bright sunlight. CAUTION • Remove ice and snow before opening the laminated panoramic roof. • Do not operate the laminated panoramic roof if it is frozen closed. • Never place heavy objects on the laminated panoramic roof. Auto open (arrow points toward the rear of the vehicle) Manual open Manual close Auto close 106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment Laminated panoramic roof* WARNING • During manual closing, if the laminated panoramic roof is obstructed, immediately open it again. • Never open or close the laminated panoramic roof if it is obstructed in any way. • Never allow a child to operate the laminated panoramic roof. • • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. Never extend any object or body part though the open laminated panoramic roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off. Automatic operation 1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the control as far back as possible (to the auto open position) and release it. 2. To fully open the laminated panoramic roof, pull the control as far back as possible a second time (to the auto open position) and release it. Quick open/close The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade can be opened/closed at the same time: • Open - pull the control back (to the auto open position) twice in quick succession and release it. • Close - push the control forward (to the auto close position) twice in quick succession and release it. Manual operation 1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) and hold it until the sun shade has opened to the position of your choice. NOTE For manual opening, the sun shade must first be fully open before it will be possible to open the laminated panoramic roof. When closing, the laminated panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun shade can be closed. 03 Tilt position 2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a second time to open the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof. 3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a third time and hold it until the laminated panoramic roof has opened to the position of your choice. Perform this procedure in reverse order to close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade. Tilt position, raised at the rear edge Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass section) by pressing the rear edge of the control upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward and holding it until the laminated panoramic roof has closed completely. If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Your driving environment Laminated panoramic roof* laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position. Wind blocker 03 The moonroof is equipped with a wind blocker that folds up when the moonroof is open. 108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment HomeLink® Wireless Control System* Introduction • • • The HomeLink1 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Additional HomeLink information can be found on the Internet at www.homelink.com. 1 Programming HomeLink WARNING If you use HomeLink to open a garage door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage. Do not use HomeLink with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink Buttons”. NOTE Some vehicles may require the ignition switch to be turned on or to the second (“accessories”) position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 03 1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view. 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 03 Your driving environment HomeLink® Wireless Control System* found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. NOTE 03 Some devices may require you to replace this Programming Step 2 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian Programming” section. If the HomeLink indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com. 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. • If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with “Programming” steps 4-6 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener). 4. At the garage door opener receiver (motorhead unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button. This can usually be 110 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Gate Operator/Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming” pro- * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. cedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” step 2 with the following: • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds (“cycle”) your handheld transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to complete. Using HomeLink To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com. 03 Your driving environment HomeLink® Wireless Control System* Erasing HomeLink Buttons To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), follow the step noted: 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 10 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 20 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “Programming” - step 1. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. 03 NOTE The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.2 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “Programming” - step 1. 2 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine Start WARNING • 03 • Never use more than one floor mat at a time on the driver's floor. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side. Ignition switch with remote key inserted ( see page 82 for more information on ignition modes) WARNING Before starting the engine: 1 2 112 • • Fasten the seat belt. • Make sure the brake pedal can be depressed completely. Adjust the seat if necessary. Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. 1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot as far as possible, with the metallic key blade pointing outward (not inserted into the slot)1. 2. Depress the brake pedal2. 3. Press and release the START/STOP ENGINE button. The autostart function will operate the starter motor until the engine starts or until its overheating function stops it. On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. The starter motor operates for a maximum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not started, repeat the procedure. NOTE Keyless drive* To start a vehicle equipped with the keyless drive feature, one of the remote keys must be in the passenger compartment. Follow the instructions in step 3 to start the vehicle. 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine WARNING 3 • Always remove the remote key from the ignition slot when leaving the vehicle, especially if there are children in the vehicle. • Never open the driver's door while driving or when the vehicle is being towed. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the vehicle. On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, never remove the remote key from the vehicle while driving or during towing. • Always place the gear selector in Park and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous. NOTE • After a cold start, idle speed may be noticeably higher than normal for a short period. This is done to help bring components in the emission control system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which enables them to control emissions and help reduce the vehicle's impact on the environment3. CAUTION • When starting in cold weather, the automatic transmission may shift up at slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission fluid reaches normal operating temperature. • Do not race a cold engine immediately after starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to prevent engine damage. • The engine should be idling when you move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage. Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature transmission wear. • Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid. 03 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature. `` 113 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine 03 Switching off the engine To jump start your vehicle: With the engine running, press the START/ STOP ENGINE button. 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to mode 0, see page 82). If the gear selector is not in the P position or if the vehicle is moving, press the button twice or press and hold it in until the engine switches off. 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). Jump starting 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), marked with a "+" sign, located under a folding cover. 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) and to the ground point in your vehicle's engine compartment (right engine mount at the top, on the outer screw) (4). G021347 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, then start the engine in the vehicle with dead battery. Connecting the jumper cables Follow these instructions to jump start your vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle. 114 6. After the engine has started, first remove the negative (–) terminal jumper cable (black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red). WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine WARNING • Do not connect the jumper cable to any part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • • Do not smoke near the battery. 03 Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury. 115 03 Your driving environment Transmission Automatic transmission before the gear lever can be moved from the P position. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N. Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked. Press the control to apply the brake, see page 122. Drive (D) 03 D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be at a standstill when shifting from position R to position D. Geartronic–manual shifting G021351 Geartronic allows you to manually shift among your vehicle's six forward speeds. Geartronic can be selected at any time. Shiftgate positions1 • To access the manual shifting position Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the gear selector between the R, N, D, and P positions. The gear selector can be moved freely between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and Drive (D) positions while driving. Park position (P) from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right (to the area marked M in the illustration. • To return to the D position from the manual CAUTION The vehicle must be stationary when position P is selected. When P has been selected, the transmission is mechanically blocked in this position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II (see page 82) 1 116 While driving • If you select the manual shifting position Select the P position when starting or parking. Shiftlock shifting position, move the gear selector to the left. Reverse ®) The vehicle must be stationary when position R is selected. Neutral position (N) No gear is engaged and the engine can be started with the gear selector in this position. while driving, the gear that was being used in the Drive position will also initially be selected in the manual shifting position. • Move the gear selector forward (toward "+") to shift to a higher gear or rearward (toward "–") to shift to a lower gear. The information display (see page 75) shows the gear selector's position or the selected gear by displaying the following: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6. 03 Your driving environment Transmission • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", the transmission will downshift one gear at a time and will utilize the braking power of the engine. If the current speed is too high for using a lower gear, the downshift will not occur until the speed has decreased enough to allow the lower gear to be used. • If you slow to a very low speed, the trans- not switch to manual shifting mode until the gear selector is moved forward or rearward toward + or –. Sport mode can be selected any time. NOTE • When the transmission is in Sport mode, the transmission symbol in the main instrument panel will change from D to S (see page 75). • Please be aware that using Sport mode may result in a slight decrease in fuel economy. Driving in D can help improve fuel economy. mission will automatically shift down. Shiftlock – Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. To be able to move the gear selector from N to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in position II, see page 82. Geartronic–Sport mode (S)2 This transmission mode provides sportier shifting characteristics and enables a more active driving style by making it possible to drive at higher rpm in each gear before shifting up. The engine also responds faster when the throttle pedal is pressed. To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move the gear selector to the right. The transmission will 2 3 selector forward again and release it to select 3rd gear. 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently on the accelerator pedal. Shiftlock override 03 Geartronic–starting on slippery surfaces Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so: 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector to the right from the D position to the manual shifting position. The text in the instrument panel display will change from D to 1. 2. Press the gear selector forward and release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example because of a dead battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position before the vehicle can be moved3. Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the storage compartment behind the center console to expose the small opening for overriding the shiftlock system. Certain models only If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 114. `` 117 03 Your driving environment Transmission Insert the key blade into the opening. Press the key blade down as far as possible and keep it held down. Move the gear selector from the P position. For information on the key blade, see page 61. 03 All Wheel Drive – AWD4 Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction. 4 118 Standard on certain models. NOTE The message AWD disabled Service required will be appear in the information display if an electrical fault should occur in the AWD system. A warning light will also illuminate in the instrument panel. If this occurs, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 03 Your driving environment Brakes Brake system Brake pad inspection The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake circuit. On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition of the brake pads can be checked by raising the vehicle (see page 306 for information about using the jack and removing a wheel) and performing a visual inspection of the brake pads. If the brake pedal must be depressed farther than normal and requires greater foot pressure, the stopping distance will be longer. A warning light in the instrument panel will light up to warn the driver that a fault has occurred. • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel hub, brake components, etc., will be very hot. Allow time for these components to cool before carrying out the inspection. • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. NOTE WARNING • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle. • The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. WARNING If this light comes on while driving or braking, stop immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain pressure on the pedal – do not pump the brakes. WARNING 03 Brake lights The brake lights come on automatically when the brakes are applied. Adaptive brake lights The adaptive brake lights activate in the event of sudden braking or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help alert vehicles traveling behind. The adaptive brake lights activate if: `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 03 Your driving environment Brakes • The ABS system activates for more than approximately a half second • In the event of sudden braking while the vehicle is moving at speeds above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) 03 When the vehicle has come to a stop, the brake lights and additional taillights remain on for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or until braking force on the vehicle is reduced. Power brakes function only when the engine is running The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure which is only created when the engine is running. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with the engine switched off. If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal to compensate for the lack of power assistance. This can happen for example when towing your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels harder than usual. 120 brakes are needed, depress the pedal occasionally when driving through rain, slush, etc. This will remove the water from the brakes. Check that brake application feels normal. This should also be done after washing or starting in very damp or cold weather. Severe strain on the brake system The brakes will be subject to severe strain when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually slower, which means that the cooling of the brakes is less efficient than when driving on level roads. To reduce the strain on the brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the engine help with the braking. Do not forget that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will be subjected to a greater than normal load. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Water on brake discs and brake pads affects braking The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) helps to improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. When the system "senses" impending lockup, braking pressure is automatically modulated in order to help prevent lockup that could lead to a skid. Driving in rain and slush or passing through an automatic car wash can cause water to collect on the brake discs and pads. This will cause a delay in braking effect when the pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay when the The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module, which is normal. Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This delay is minimized by cleaning the brake linings. Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving. Emergency Brake Assistance EBA is designed to provide full brake effect immediately in the event of sudden, hard braking. The system is activated by the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed. When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released. 03 Your driving environment Brakes NOTE • • When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You must maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. There will be no braking effect if the pedal is released. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released. When the vehicle has been parked for some time, the brake pedal may sink more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal will return to its usual position when it is released. Symbols in the instrument panel Symbol Specification Steady glow – Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss. 03 Steady glow for two seconds when the engine is started – There was a fault in the brake system's ABS function when the engine was last running. WARNING If and come on at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. 121 03 Your driving environment Parking brake Electric parking brake Applying the electric parking brake An electric parking brake has the same function as a manual parking brake. NOTE • In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by holding in the control. Braking will be interrupted when the accelerator pedal is depressed or the control is released. • An audible signal will sound during this procedure if the vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). NOTE 03 • • A faint sound from the parking brake's electric motor can be heard when the parking brake is being applied. This sound can also be heard during the automatic function check of the parking brake. The brake pedal will move slightly when the electric parking brake is applied or released. Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 114. Parking on a hill • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front Parking brake control 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Push the control. > The symbol in the instrument panel flashes while the parking bake is being applied, and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill. 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P. 122 wheels so that they point away from the curb. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point toward the curb. The parking brake should also be applied. 03 Your driving environment Parking brake Releasing the electric parking brake NOTE • • For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seat belt. Symbols Symbol Read the message in the information display A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display. The electric parking brake will be released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or R. 2. Fasten the seat belt. Parking brake control Manual release 1. Fasten the seat belt. 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot (or press the START/STOP ENGINE button on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 4. Pull the parking brake control. Automatic release 1. Start the engine. 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake will release when the vehicle begins to move. Specification 03 Messages Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. To help avoid this: 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever pushed in with the left hand while shifting into Drive with the right. 2. While pressing the throttle pedal to pull away, release the parking brake lever only after the vehicle begins to move. Park brake not fully released – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If the problem persists, contact `` 123 03 Your driving environment Parking brake an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. 03 Parking brake not applied – A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds. Parking brake Service required – A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains. WARNING If the vehicle must be parked before the fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so that they point away from the curb if the vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb if it is pointing downhill. 124 03 Your driving environment Hill Descent Control (HDC)* Introduction Function Using HDC Normally, when the accelerator pedal is released while driving down hills, the vehicle's speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm (the normal engine braking effect). However, if the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases despite the engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes must be applied to reduce the vehicle's speed. HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and makes it possible to increase or decrease the vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without applying the brakes. The brake system functions automatically to maintain a low and steady speed. HDC is particularly useful when driving down steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the road may have slippery patches. WARNING HDC does not function in all situations, and is a supplementary braking aid. The driver has full responsibility for driving in a safe manner. HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph (7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator pedal can be used to select any speed that is possible in first or reverse gears. When the accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gear selected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not necessary to apply the brakes. 03 • The brake lights illuminate automatically • HDC can be switched on and off with the button in the center console. An indicator light in the button illuminates when HDC is activated. when HDC is controlling the vehicle's speed. • The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at any time by applying the brakes. HDC is deactivated when: • The indicator light • The button on the center console is • HDC only functions when first or reverse • A gear higher than first gear is selected • D is selected on vehicles with an automatic in the instrument panel illuminates and a message is displayed when the system is controlling the vehicle's speed. gears are selected (1 will be shown in the instrument panel display when first gear is selected). pressed transmission HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is done while driving down a steep hill, the system's braking effect will decrease gradually. NOTE HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 03 Your driving environment Hill Descent Control (HDC)* NOTE Engine response to pressure on the accelerator pedal may be slightly slower than normal when HDC is activated. 03 126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment 03 127 Volvo Sensus........................................................................................ Menus and messages........................................................................... The MY CAR menus.............................................................................. Climate system..................................................................................... Trip computer........................................................................................ Stability system..................................................................................... Active chassis system–Four C*............................................................. Cruise control........................................................................................ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*............................................................ Distance Alert* ..................................................................................... City Safety™ ........................................................................................ Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection*...... Driver Alert System* ............................................................................. Park assist*........................................................................................... Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* .......................................................... Blind Spot Information System*............................................................ Passenger compartment convenience................................................. 128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 130 131 133 139 147 149 151 152 154 164 167 172 180 186 190 194 198 COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Volvo Sensus Introduction menus, the climate and infotainment systems as well as other options such as the park assist camera(s), etc. Volvo Sensus uses the screen in the center instrument panel to display information and selections are made using this panel’s controls and buttons. Certain features can also be controlled using the steering wheel keypad. Press MY CAR to present all of the available settings related to driving and/or controlling the vehicle, such as City Safety, setting the clock, lock settings, etc. 04 Center console control panel Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: see the separate VNS manual for operating instructions. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*): see the infotainment system overview beginning on page 206. Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR: see page 133. Press RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, NAV* and CAM* to change a source and to activated systems or functions such as AM, FM1, CD, DVD, Bluetooth, navigation* and the park assist camera *. See the respective sections in this manual for more detailed information about your vehicle's various features and functions. Park assist camera - CAM*: see page 190. Climate system: see page 139. Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle providing a coordinated interface for a number of functions such as the individualized settings that can be made in the MY CAR 130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages Main instrument panel Average Press READ to acknowledge and scroll among the messages. Instantaneous Average speed NOTE Current speed in mph (Canadian models only) Calibrate tire pressure If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read and confirmed by pressing READ before the previous activity can be resumed. Messages Message Description Stop safely Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Stopping the engine Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Service urgent Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop immediately. G022908 Engine oil level* Information display and menu controls READ – access to the list of messages and message confirmation. RESET – reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective function. The menus shown on the information displays in the instrument panel are controlled with the left lever. The menus shown depend on ignition mode. Press READ to erase a message and return to the menus. Menu overview Driving distance on current fuel reserve G028940 Thumbwheel – browse among menus and options in the list of functions. When a warning, information or indicator symbol comes on, a corresponding message appears on the information display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault is rectified. 04 `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and messages 04 132 Message Description Message Description Service required Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Volvo workshop as soon as possible. Maintenance overdue See manual Read the owner's manual. If the service intervals are not followed, the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for service. Book time for maintenance Time to book service at an authorized Volvo retailer. Temporarily OFF Time for regular maintenance Time for regular service at an authorized Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of miles driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time. A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again. Power save mode The audio system is switched off to save current. Charge the battery. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Introduction The menu system provides access to menus for operating many of the vehicle's functions, such as setting the clock, door mirrors, locks, etc. Operation • Press EXIT briefly to go back one step at a Center console controls • Press and hold EXIT to go to the main MY time in the current menu. CAR menu. • From the main MY CAR menu, press and hold EXIT to go to the infotainment system's main view. See page 208 for additional information. Navigating in the menus is done using the buttons on the center console control panel or with the right-side steering wheel keypad. Steering wheel keypad Some of the features mentioned in this section are optional. 04 Center console controls for menu navigation Press MY CAR to access the My Car menus. Press OK/MENU to select a highlighted selection or to store a certain function in the system's memory. Turn to navigate up/down among menu selections. EXIT EXIT functions EXIT can be used to go back in the menu structure or to cancel the most recent selection. The results of pressing EXIT vary, depending on where you are in the menu structure. The keypad varies according to the vehicle's equipment Turn the thumb wheel to go up/down among menu selections. Press the thumb wheel to make a selection or store a function in the system's memory. EXIT. `` 133 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Paths The current menu level is displayed at the upper right of the center console display. Menu paths are displayed as follows, for example: Settings Car settings Lock settings Doors unlock Driver door, then all The following is an example of how to set a function in the menu system: 04 EXIT (2) or press and hold this button to return to the main menu. The OK/MENU (2), EXIT (4) and control (3) in the center console can be used in the same way. MY CAR When the MY CAR symbol has been selected, the following menu alternatives are displayed. 1. Press the MY CAR button on the center console control panel. 2. Navigate to a menu, for example Settings using the thumb wheel (1) and press it to open a submenu. MY CAR 4. Navigate to Lock settings and press the thumb wheel to open a new submenu. 5. Navigate to Doors unlock and press the thumb wheel to open a submenu with alternatives that can be selected. 6. Use the thumb wheel to move to the desired choice and press the thumb wheel to put an X in the box. 7. Finish by exiting the menu system either one step at a time with short presses on My XC60 The display shows all of the vehicle's driver support systems, which can be activated/ deactivated here. 3. Navigate to the desired submenu such as Car settings. 134 My XC60 • My XC60 • Support systems • Settings 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Driver support systems Doors unlock All doors Driver door, then all Keyless entry All doors Any door Doors on same side See page 57 for more information. Approach light duration Off 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec See page 58 for more information. Both front doors Audible confirmation See page 57 and 63 for more information. MY CAR Support systems (MY CAR > Support systems) The screen shows the current status (settings) for the vehicle's driver support systems. Reduced Guard Activate once Ask when exiting See page 70 for more information. Menu settings The following pages list the main menus/submenus and possible selections. Car key memory See pages 86 and 57 for more information. Lock settings Automatic door locking Side mirror settings Fold mirrors Tilt left mirror Home safe light duration 04 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec See page 96 for more information. Triple indicator See page 95 for more information. Daytime running lights See page 92 for more information. Tilt right mirror See page 103 for more information. Light settings Door lock confirmation light Unlock confirmation light Active bending lights See page 93 for more information. Tire pressure system Warns if tire pressure is too low `` 135 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Calibrate tire pressure Lane Departure Warning See page 309 for more information. Lane Departure Warning Steering wheel force On at start-up Increased sensitivity High 04 Medium See page 183 for more information. Low DSTC See page 149 for more information. Reset car settings City Safety This feature returns the "Car settings" menu to the original factory settings. See page 167 for more information. Settings Driver support BLIS Driver Alert Settings System options Normal Short Warning sound See page 174 for more information. Set/change time See page 80 for more information. Time format 12 h 24 h 136 MPG (US) km/l See page 180 for more information. MY CAR Distance and fuel units MPG (UK) Warning distance Long Show help text This displays help texts for the current menu. See page 194 for more information. See page 164 for more information. Collision Warning Language Select the language for menu texts. Distance Alert Collision Warning The contents of the screen are replaced by another image if this selection is marked. The contents of the screen will be displayed again if one of the buttons (1-4) is pressed, see page 133. Uncheck the selection to turn the screen saver off. See page 151 for more information. MY CAR systems Screensaver l/100km See page 147 for more information about the trip computer. Temperature unit Celsius Fahrenheit Select the temperature scale to be displayed by the climate control unit. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus Navigation repeat instruction Volume levels Navigation go to address Voice output volume Front park assist volume General commands Rear park assist volume Help Phone ringing volume Cancel Voice tutorial Reset system options This feature returns the "System options" menu to the original factory settings. MY CAR A Settings Voice settingsA. Only on vehicles with the optional Volvo Navigation System and/or a Bluetooth-connected cell phone Voice tutorial Select this menu alternative and press OK for spoken information about how the system works. Voice command list Phone commands Phone Phone call contact Phone dial number Navigation commands Navigation The menu alternatives under Phone commands show examples of the voice commands available when a cell phone is connected to the Bluetooth hands-free system. See page 241 for more detailed information. Voice training User 1 User 2 Voice training enables the system to become familiar with the driver's voice and pronunciation. A list of phrases is presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud. When the system has registered the driver's pronunciation, no additional phrases will be displayed. After completed voice training, select User 1 or User 2 in Voice user setting to set the system to the current user. The menu alternatives under Navigation commands show examples of the voice commands available for the optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the navigation system's manual for detailed information. Voice output volume Voice user setting Default setting 3. Store the setting and leave the menu by pressing EXIT. User 1 Voice POI list User 2 Two user profiles can be set, which is useful if more than one person uses voice commands regularly. Default setting resets the factory settings. 04 • A volume control will be displayed. To set the volume level: 1. Adjust the volume using the thumb wheel 2. Test the setting by pressing OK Edit list The navigation system has a large number of points of interest (POIs). A maximum of 30 POIs can be stored in this list. The menu alternative Voice POI list is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with the `` 137 04 Comfort and driving pleasure The MY CAR menus optional Volvo Navigation System. Refer to the navigation system's manual for detailed information. See page 211 for more information about this feature. MY CAR MY CAR Settings Settings Information Audio settings Number of keys See page 204 for more information about the infotainment system. See page 56 for more information. VIN number 04 MY CAR Settings Climate settings See page 351 for more information. DivX® VOD code Automatic blower adjustment Normal Bluetooth software version in car High See page 232 for more information. Low Map and software version Recirculation timer Automatic rear defroster Interior air quality system Reset climate settings This feature returns the "Climate settings" menu to the original factory settings. For more information about the climate system, see page 139. MY CAR 138 See page 226 for more information. Settings Favorites (FAV) Refer to the optional Volvo Navigation System manual for more information. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system Introduction Air conditioning The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate Control (ECC). The climate control system cools, heats or dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. NOTE The sunlight sensor monitors which side of the car that is most exposed to sunlight. This can mean that the temperature may differ between the right and left-side air vents, even if the temperatures set for both sides of the passenger compartment are the same. NOTE • • The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be on. • The temperature sensor for the passenger In warm weather, a small amount of water may accumulate under the car when it has been parked. This water is condensation from the A/C system and is normal. • The humidity sensor* is located in the inte- Sensor location • The sunlight sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard. compartment is located below the climate control panel. • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor is located on the door mirror. rior rearview mirror. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. mercially available window washing spray will also help prevent fogging or misting. Temporary shut-off of the air conditioning The air conditioning is momentarily disengaged during full-throttle acceleration or when driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature. Ice and snow Always keep the air intake grille at the base of the windshield free of snow. 04 Climate system maintenance Special tools and equipment are required to maintain and carry out repairs on the climate system. Work of this type should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Refrigerant Side windows and laminated panoramic roof To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally, the side windows, and the laminated panoramic roof should be closed. Volvo cares about the environment. The air conditioning system in your car contains a CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance will not deplete the ozone layer. The air conditioning system contains 1.8 lbs (820 g) of R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. Passenger compartment filter Fog on the inside of the windows The defroster function should be used to remove fog or mist from the inside of the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a com- Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at the recommended intervals. Please refer to `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, or consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for these intervals. The filter should be replaced more often when driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should always be replaced with a new one. NOTE 04 There are different types of cabin air filters. Ensure that the correct type is installed. Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles in the incoming air, thereby reducing the levels of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. NOTE Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air filter replacement intervals. 140 Materials used in the cabin Air distribution The materials used in the cabin have been developed to help minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. Use car cleaning products recommended by Volvo. See also the information beginning on page 344. Menu settings The default settings for four of the climate system's functions can be changed in the menu system. • Blower speed in automatic mode. • Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air. • Automatic rear window defrosting. • The optional Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). The functions can also be returned to factory settings in the menu system. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. The incoming air is distributed from a number of different vents in the passenger compartment. Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode. If desired, air distribution can be controlled manually, see page 146. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars 04 Open Closed Closed Open Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat. `` 141 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system Electronic climate control, ECC 04 Temperature control, driver's side Heated front passenger's seat* Heated driver's seat* Temperature control, passenger's side Defroster (maximum effect) Recirculation Blower AUTO Manual air distribution—floor A/C on/off Manual air distribution—dashboard air vents Manual air distribution—defroster Heated rear window and door mirrors, see page 104 142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system Climate system controls Seat heating will automatically switch off when the engine is switched off. Heated front seats* Heated rear seats*1 NOTE If the blower is turned off completely, the air conditioning is disengaged, which may result in fogging on the windows. Air distribution 04 The current seat temperature is shown in the center console display Press the button once for the highest heat level – three indicator lights come on. Heat control for the outboard seating positions is done in the same way as for the front seats. Blower control Press the button twice for a lower heat level – two indicator lights come on. Press the button three times for the lowest heat level – one indicator light comes on. Press the button four times to switch off the heat – no indicator lights come on. 1 Manual air distribution—defroster Turn the control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the blower speed. If AUTO is selected, blower speed will be regulated automatically and this will override manual adjustment. Manual air distribution—dashboard air vents Manual air distribution—floor The figure consists of three buttons. When a button is pressed, the corresponding figure will appear in the display with an arrow indicating which manual air flow has been selected (see Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system the following illustration). See also the air distribution chart on page 146. Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal or High. NOTE Selecting the lowest blower speed may increases the risk of fog forming on the windows. 04 Temperature control The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set separately. When the vehicle is started, the most recent setting is resumed. Air distribution is shown in the center console display Auto The function automatically regulates cooling, heating, blower speed, recirculation, and air distribution to maintain the chosen temperature. If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically. The air quality sensor is engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE. 144 A/C – ON/OFF When the indicator light in the button is on, the air conditioning is controlled automatically. This cools/heats and dehumidifies the incoming air. When the indicator light in the button is off, the air conditioning is disengaged. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When maximum defroster is selected, the air conditioning system is set for maximum blower speed and dehumidification. Defroster This function defrosts/de-ices the windshield and front side windows. The indicator light in the defroster button lights when the function is active. NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required. • Blower speed increases automatically and the air conditioning will switch on (if not already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment. Air conditioning can be switched off by pressing the AC button. • Recirculation will not function while defrost is engaged. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system The climate system will return to its previous settings when the defroster function is switched off. Recirculation/air quality system Recirculation This function can be used to shut out exhaust fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is then recirculated, i.e., no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this function is activated. The indicator light in the button will illuminate when recirculation is selected. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of condensation forming on the insides of the windows, especially in winter. Timer The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off the function after a certain length of time, depending on the ambient temperature. Activate/ deactivate the function under Climate settings Recirculation timer. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. When the AUTO button is depressed the air quality sensor is always engaged. Activate or deactivate this function in Climate settings Interior air quality system. NOTE NOTE When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated. Interior Air Quality System–IAQS* This system consists of a multifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter helps remove gases and particles from the incoming air, thereby reducing the amounts of odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. The air quality sensor detects increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air • The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment. • Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid fogging. • If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor. Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear windows. 04 `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate system Air distribution table 04 146 Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Air to windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged. To remove de-fog/deice the front side windows and windshield quickly. Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents. To ensure comfortable conditions and good defogging in cold or humid weather. Air to windshield and side windows. Some air flows from the air dashboard vents. In cold or humid weather (blower speed should be moderate to high). Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. In sunny weather with cool outside temperatures. Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. To ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather. Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows. To warm or cool the feet. Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents. To ensure efficient cooling in warm weather. Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. To cool the feet or provide warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer Functions Introduction NOTE G022909 If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowledge a message by pressing READ. Information display and controls To change the unit of measure specified for distance and speed, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Average speed READ–press to acknowledge/confirm/ erase a message) The system calculates the average speed from the last resetting. Reset using RESET. Thumb wheel (used to scroll among the trip computer menus) Current speed in mph (Canadian models only) RESET–resets certain functions This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed from km/h to mph. To scroll through trip computer information, move the thumb wheel up or down. Continue turning to return to the starting point. Current speed in km/h (U.S. models only) This function provides the driver with an instantaneous conversion of the car's current speed from mph to km/h. Current fuel consumption (Instantaneous) Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is updated every few seconds. When the vehicle is stationary, "----" appears on the display. Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the last reset. Reset using RESET. Driving distance on current fuel reserve This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank. The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank when the reading was taken. When the message ---- miles to empty tank appears in the display, refuel as soon as possible. 04 NOTE The actual distance that can be driven on the usable fuel remaining in the tank may be influenced by a change in driving style. See also page 262 for information on driving economically. Resetting 1. Select --- mph average speed or --.mpg average. 2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If RESET is kept depressed for at 3 three `` 147 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer seconds, Average speed and Average fuel consumption are reset simultaneously. 04 148 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Stability system Introduction Spin control (SC) The Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) consists of a number of functions designed help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding, and to generally help improve directional stability. The spin control function is designed to help prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. CAUTION A pulsating sound will be audible when the system is actively operating and is normal. Traction control (TC) This function is designed to help reduce wheel spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). Engine Drag Control (EDC) EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when shifting down in the Geartronic manual shifting mode or while using the engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If the engine were to stop, power steering would not function, making the vehicle more difficult to steer. Trailer Stability Assist – TSA* TC is most active at low speeds. Trailer Stability Assist helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. See page 279 for more information. This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and cannot be switched off. This system is automatically deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode. Active Yaw Control (AYC) This function helps maintain directional stability, for example when cornering, by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. This is one of DSTC's permanent functions and cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select Sport mode, which offers more active driving characteristics. In this mode, the engine management system monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving by allowing more lateral movement of the rear wheels before DSTC is activated. Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use Sport mode for maximum tractive force. 04 If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator pedal, DSTC will also activate to help stabilize the vehicle. To switch to Sport mode: 1. Press the My Car button in the center console control panel and select My XC60 DSTC in the menu. 2. Unselect the symbol and leave the menu by pressing EXIT. > This puts DSTC in Sport mode. Operation Sport mode The stability system is always activated and cannot be switched off. Sport mode remains active until the driver switches it off in the menu or until the engine is switched off. DSTC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Stability system Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel Symbol Message Description DSTC Temporarily OFF The DSTC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. DSTC reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled. DSTC Service required The DSTC system is not functioning properly. • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected. 04 "Message" Read the message in the information display Steady glow for 2 secs. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test. Flashing symbol DSTC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid. - Sport mode has been activated. and WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions. 150 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Active chassis system–Four C* Active chassis (Four C) Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced. ing is done at high rpm in each gear for dynamic and active driving. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, see page 133. Operation NOTE This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in motion. NOTE This system is available on Canadian models only. 04 Comfort Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride and the transmission shifts gears at lower rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for long-distance highway driving. The indicator light in the button will be on when this mode is selected. Sport In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is reduced during cornering and steering response is more immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driving. The indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been selected. Advanced In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal and steering response is very direct. Gear shift- Chassis settings Use the buttons in the center console to change setting. The setting in use when the engine is switched off is activated the next time the engine is started. Speed-dependent steering force* Steering force increases with the speed of the vehicle to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. At low speed the vehicle is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc. Steering force can be changed under MY CAR Car settings Steering wheel force. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Cruise control Operation > The symbol illuminates and the text (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise control is in standby mode. 2. Press or for approximately a half second and release the button to increase or decrease vehicle speed by approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). NOTE 04 • Putting cruise control in standby mode does not set a cruising speed. • When cruise control is in standby mode, the driver's seat belt must be fastened before a cruising speed can be set. NOTE • A temporary increase in speed by pressing the accelerator pedal, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. • If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control. Setting a speed Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode Resume set speed NOTE Deactivating Activate/set speed Set speed indicator (parentheses indicate standby mode) Engaging the cruise control function Before a speed can be set, the cruise control system must be engaged (put in standby mode). 152 Press the Use the or buttons set the vehicle's current speed. The set speed is shown in the display. symbol (1). Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). Automatic deactivation Adjusting the set speed After a speed has been set, it can be increased or buttons. or decreased by using the 1. Press and hold down or until the vehicle reaches the desired speed. > This will become the set speed when the button is released. Cruise control is automatically deactivated temporarily if one of the following occurs: • If the speed drops below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). • When the brake pedal is depressed. • If the gear selector is moved to position N. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Cruise control • During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. • If the vehicle's speed is increased by using the accelerator pedal for more than 1 minute. The currently set speed will be saved in the system's memory. WARNING Cruise control should not be used in heavy traffic or when driving on wet or slippery roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed on steep downgrades. Temporary deactivation The driver can temporarily deactivate cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information display. 04 Resume set speed If cruise control has been deactivated temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The vehicle's speed returns to the most recently set speed. WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed. Deactivation Cruise control is disengaged by pressing or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared. 153 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* Introduction Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an optional system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads. When the driver has set the desired speed and the time interval to the vehicle ahead, ACC functions as follows: 04 WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The "Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using this feature. • This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead. • If there are no other vehicles in the lane ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at the set speed. • If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the system will adapt your vehicle's speed to help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead. When there are no longer slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to resume the set speed. • If ACC is switched off completely or in standby mode and your vehicle comes too close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will be warned by the Distance Alert system (see page 164). 1 154 The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. Function Function overview1 Warning light, braking by driver required Controls in steering wheel Radar sensor in front grille Adaptive Cruise Control consists of: • A cruise control system to maintain a set speed • A system to maintain a set distance to the vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a time interval. For example, you can choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The actual distance required to maintain a 2-second interval will vary according the speed of the vehicles. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* WARNING WARNING • • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects. The ACC system is designed to smoothly regulate speed. However, the driver must apply the brakes in situations that require immediate braking. This applies when there are great differences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all, see page 159. • The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system. This is normal. 2 WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle. The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control system modulates the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the brake pedal. WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed. However, if the vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, ACC disengages (goes into standby mode) and will no longer modulate the brakes2. The driver will then have to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. When Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or is switched off completely, the brakes will not be modulated automatically. The driver must assume full control over the vehicle. Warning light—driver braking required Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations requiring more brake force than ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply the brakes, an audible signal from the Collision Warning system will sound and warning light will illuminate (see page 173) in the windshield to alert the driver to react. 04 NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. Does not apply to vehicles with the optional Queue Assist. See page 158 for more information. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* WARNING Operation Before ACC can be used to regulate speed and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it must first be put in standby mode. Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see page 159. In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary. To do so: Press ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly level roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver should always be prepared to apply the brakes if necessary. NOTE Controls and display Resume previous settings, increase speed (each additional press increases speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h). Standby mode on/off Set time interval Put in active mode and set a speed Set speed (parentheses indicate standby mode) Time interval while it is being set Time interval after it has been set 156 . The symbol appears in the display and parentheses (---) indicate that ACC is in standby mode. Steep inclines and/or heavy loads 04 Putting ACC in standby mode * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. The driver's door must be closed and the driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC can be put in active mode. If the driver's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's door is opened, ACC will return to standby mode. Setting a speed Once ACC has been put in standby mode, use the or buttons to store (set) the vehicle's current speed. This puts the system in active mode. The set speed, for example 55 mph, is shown in the display. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* When the symbol on the left side of the display changes to , the radar sensor has detected another vehicle ahead. The distance to a vehicle ahead is only regulated when this symbol ( ) is illuminated. Changing the set speed After a speed has been set, it can be increased or decreased by using the or buttons. Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's speed changes by 5 mph (approximately 8 km/h). butWhen the system is in active mode, the ton has the same function as , but results in a smaller increase in speed. Setting a time interval The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be and decreased by increased by pressing pressing . The current time interval is shown briefly in the display following adjustment. Different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 1–5 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 2.5 seconds. At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations. NOTE • • If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control buttons is pressed for more than approximately one minute, ACC will be deactivated. The engine must then be switched off and restarted to reset ACC. In some situations Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be put in active mode. Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display, see page 162. The number of bars indicating the selected time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward. A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is also displayed when Distance Alert is in active mode, see page 164 . 04 Standby mode (temporary deactivation) Press to temporarily deactivate cruise control (put it in standby mode). The set speed, for example 55 mph, is then shown in parentheses. The previously set speed and time interval are resumed by pressing . WARNING • Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. • A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed. When ACC is in active mode, the vehicle’s speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h) each additional time is pressed. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* Standby mode due to action by the driver ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode: • • • • • when the brakes are applied if the driver's seat belt is taken off • the wheels lose traction • brake temperature is high • the radar sensor is obstructed by, for example, wet snow or rain. If the driver's door is opened if the gear selector is moved to N Queue Assist* if the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 1 minute. The following functions are linked to your vehicle's automatic transmission and comprise the Queue Assist feature. 04 NOTE If the accelerator pedal is only depressed for a short time, such as when passing another vehicle, ACC is deactivated temporarily and is reactivated when the pedal is released. Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is linked to other systems such as the stability and traction control system (DSTC). If this system is not functioning properly, adaptive cruise control is automatically deactivated and will go into standby mode. In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver must then intervene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the surrounding traffic and regulate the distance to the vehicle ahead. 158 An automatic switch to standby mode may be caused if: Please note that the lowest speed that can be set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist consists of the following features: Enhanced speed interval Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed, including a complete stop. In order to activate ACC at speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h): • The vehicle ahead must be within a reasonable distance (not farther away than approx. 100 ft/30 meters) • The lowest speed that can be selected is * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including a complete stop. During short stops (less than approximately 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehicle will begin moving again automatically as soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode. The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in one of the following ways: • By pressing • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph (4 km/h) Your vehicle will then resume following the vehicle ahead at the set time interval. NOTE ACC can remain active and keep your vehicle at a standstill for up to 2 minutes. After 2 minutes have elapsed, the parking brake will be engaged and ACC will go into standby mode. To reactivate ACC, the driver must release the parking brake (see page 123) and press . 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* Automatic standby mode when ACC changes target vehicles • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph (15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other type of object such as e.g., a speed bump. • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph (15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to follow. No automatic braking when at a standstill If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be a stationary vehicle ahead The following only applies at speeds below approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle that the radar sensor has detected) from a moving vehicle to a stationary one, the system will apply the brakes in your vehicle. WARNING At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC will not react to a stationary vehicle and apply the brakes but will instead accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle. ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if: In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply the brakes and go into standby mode while the vehicle is not moving. This means that the driver will have to apply the brakes. • The driver opens the door or takes off his/her seat belt • DSTC is put in Sport mode (see page 149) • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than 2 minutes • The engine has been switched off • The brakes have overheated Turning ACC off completely • From standby mode, press once. • From active mode, press twice. 04 The set speed and time interval are then cleared from the system's memory and cannot be resumed by pressing . This happens if: • • • • The driver presses the brake pedal The radar sensor and its limitations The parking brake is activated In addition to being used by ACC, the radar sensor is also used by Distance Alert (see page 164) and Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection (see page 172). This sensor is designed to detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction as your vehicle, in the same lane. The gear selected is moved to P,N or R The driver presses the ACC in standby mode button to put The parking brake is applied automatically In certain situations, ACC will apply the parking brake in order to continue keeping the vehicle at a standstill. This happens if: `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* WARNING Accessories or other objects, such as extra headlights, must not be installed in front of the grille. Modification of the radar sensor could make its use illegal. The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded: 04 • Situations where ACC may not function optimally WARNING • The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not detect other vehicles at all. • If ACC is not functioning properly, cruise control will also be disabled. if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot detect other vehicles, for example in heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are obscuring the radar sensor. NOTE Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean. • if the speed of vehicles ahead is significantly different from your own speed. Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for example a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane between your vehicle and the target vehicle. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected. 160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* In curves, the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle. • • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. The "Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using this feature. This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead. If the message Radar blocked See manual is displayed, this means that the radar signals from the sensor have been obstructed and that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects. WARNING • Fault tracing and actions WARNING • This, in turn, means that the functions of the ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection will not function. The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions. 04 Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. Cause Action The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some way. Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* Cause Action Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals. No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar. The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed. Symbols and messages in the display 04 Symbol - Message Description - Standby mode or active mode when no other vehicle has been detected. - Active mode with a detected vehicle to which ACC is adapting speed/distance. - Time interval while it is being set. - Time interval after it has been set. Turn on DSTC to enable Cruise ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC is in Sport mode. Switch DSTC to normal operating mode, see page 149 for more information. ACC cannot be put in active mode if the stability system DSTC's Spin control is switched off. See page 149 for more information. - Cruise control Cancelled ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver must regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the vehicle ahead. 162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* Symbol - Message Description Cruise control Unavailable ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to: • high brake temperature • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.) Radar blocked See manual ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 159 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations. 04 Cruise control Service required ACC is not functioning. Press Brake To hold + an audible signal The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal. – Below 20 mph Only following This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Distance Alert* Introduction NOTE Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Control and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. 04 Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time interval information is only given for a vehicle that is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill. Distance Alert only monitors distance to the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or off. Depending on the optional equipment selected, there may not be room for a Distance Alert button in the center console. In this case, the function is controlled through the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Settings Car settings Distance alert On/Off. WARNING Distance Alert only indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the speed of your vehicle. Setting a time interval Operation Controls and display Time interval: Increase/decrease Time interval: On, while it is being set Amber warning light1. An amber warning light in the windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one ahead than the set time interval. 1 164 Time interval: On, after it has been set Press the button in the center instrument panel to switch this function on or off. The indicator light in the button illuminates when the function is on. The illustration is schematic - certain details may vary from model to model * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. to increase the interval or Press decrease it. to 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Distance Alert* Five different time intervals can be selected and are shown in the display as 1–5 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar represents approximately 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is approximately 2.5 seconds. The number of bars indicating the selected time interval are shown while the setting is being made and for several seconds afterward. A smaller version of the symbol is then shown to the right in the display. The same symbol is displayed when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated. WARNING WARNING Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. Limitations Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Collision Warning system. See page 159 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations. • Bad weather or winding roads may affect the radar sensor’s capacity to detect vehicles ahead. • The size of the vehicle ahead, such as a motorcycle, may also make it difficult to detect. This may result in the warning light illuminating at a shorter distance than the one that has been set, or that the light will not come on at all. 04 NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. NOTE • The higher your vehicle’s speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a given time interval. • The set time interval is also used by Adaptive Cruise Control, see page 156. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Distance Alert* Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Description - Time interval while it is being set. - Time interval after it has been set. Radar blocked See manual Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect other vehicles. See page 159 for information on the radar sensor’s limitations. Collision warn. Service required Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 04 166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure City Safety™ Introduction City Safety™1 is a support system designed to help the driver avoid low speed collisions when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic. City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s speed is below approximately 2 mph (4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will not react if your vehicle approaches another vehicle at very low speed, for example, when parking. The function is active at speeds up to approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and assists the driver by applying the brakes automatically, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce the effects of a collision. City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation. means that the system cannot help the driver in all situations. City Safety™ should not be used to alter the way in which the driver operates the vehicle. The driver should never rely solely on this system to safely stop the vehicle. Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be aware of City Safety™ except when the system intervenes when a low-speed collision is imminent. If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection system, the two systems interact. For more information about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake system, see page 172. WARNING • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to the driver. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. • City Safety™ does not function in all driving situations or in all traffic, weather or road conditions. • City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles traveling in the same direction as your vehicle and does not react to small vehicles, bicycles or motorcycles or to people or animals. • City Safety™ is not activated when your vehicle is backing up. • City Safety™ functions at speeds up to 18 mph (30 km/h). This system can help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in speed is greater, a collision cannot be avoided but the speed at which the collision occurs can be reduced. The driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes for full braking effect. • Never wait for City Safety™ to intervene in a potential collision situation. The City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if a low-speed collision is imminent. However, the system will not intervene in situations where the driver actively steers the vehicle or applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot be avoided. This is done in order to always give the driver’s actions highest priority. City Safety™ activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time, which 1 04 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation `` 167 04 Comfort and driving pleasure City Safety™ driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Function The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid a collision or reduce its effect. in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. may obscure the hood and windshield. When the function activates and applies the brakes, a message will appear in the information display to indicate that the system is/has been active. When the engine is running, City Safety™ can be switched off as follows: NOTE 04 Location of the laser sensor in the windshield2 City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you using a laser sensor mounted in the upper section of the windshield. If a collision is imminent, City Safety™ will automatically apply the brakes, which may feel like hard braking. If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone cannot prevent a collision from taking place. 2 168 • When City Safety™ applies the brakes, the brake lights will illuminate. • In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then release the brakes. The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. Using City Safety™ NOTE The City Safety™ function is activated automatically each time the engine has been switched off and restarted. On and Off In certain situations, it may be desirable to switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving The illustration is schematic; details will vary, depending on the model Press My Car in the center console control panel and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems City Safety. Select Off. If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will reactivate when the engine is restarted. WARNING The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City Safety™ has been switched off. To switch City Safety™ on again: • Follow the same procedure as for switching City Safety™ off but select ON. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure City Safety™ Limitations The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and darkness. However, there are certain limitations and the laser sensor’s function may be reduced by, for example, heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensation, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield may also interfere with the sensor’s function. Objects such as warning flags hanging from long objects on the roof or accessories such as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the front of the vehicle that are higher than the hood may also impede the sensor’s function. Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases on slippery road surfaces, which may reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a collision. In situations like this, the DSTC system (see page 149) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability. City Safety™ emits infrared light and measures the way in which the light is reflected. Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflective surfaces may not be detected. Normally, the license plate and taillight reflectors give the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient reflective surfaces to be detected. NOTE Cause Action • Keep the windshield in front of the laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. See page 168. Clean the windshield or remove the ice/snow. • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow. The area of the windshield in front of the sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow. • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could obstruct the laser sensor. The laser sensor's field of view is obstructed. Remove the obstruction. 04 CAUTION Troubleshooting If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in the information display, this indicates that the City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead of you, which means that the system is not functioning. However, this message will not be displayed in all situations in which the sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the sensor is always kept clean. The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions. If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front the laser sensor and covers an area of approximately 1/50 x 1/10 in. (0.5 x 3 mm) or larger, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield (see the illustration showing the location of the sensor on page 168). Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety™ functionality. To help prevent reduced functionality, please also observe the following: • If the windshield is replaced, use the same type or a windshield approved by Volvo. • When replacing windshield wipers, use the same type or ones approved by Volvo. `` 169 04 Comfort and driving pleasure City Safety™ The laser sensor Maximum pulse energy WARNING 2.64 μJ Maximum average output 45 mW Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed: Pulse length 33 ns • Divergence (horizontal × vertical) 28° × 12° It is essential that all pertinent instructions be followed when handling laser instruments. Testing, repairing, removing, adjusting and/or replacing any components in the laser sensor may only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Do not remove the laser sensor (including removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser class 3B present a risk of injury to the eyes. • The laser sensor’s connector must be disconnected before the sensor is removed from the windshield. The lower decal describes the laser beam's physical data and contains the text: • IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 The laser sensor must be mounted in place on the windshield before connecting the sensor’s connector. • Do not view the laser sensor (which emits spreading, invisible laser beams) with optical instruments from a distance of less than 4 inches (100 mm). NOTE The function of aftermarket laser detectors may be affected by City Safety's laser sensor. 04 The upper decal describes the laser beam's classification and contains the following text: Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class 1M laser product. The laser beam's physical data is listed in the following table: 170 WARNING The laser sensor emits light when the ignition is in mode II or higher, even if City Safety™ has been switched off. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure City Safety™ Symbols and messages in the display When City Safety™ automatically applies the brakes, one or more of the symbols in the main Symbol instrument panel may illuminate and its associated message will be displayed. A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the READ button on the turn signal lever. Message Meaning/action required Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically. 04 Windscreen Sensors blocked The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction. • Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s). For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see page 169. City Safety Service required City Safety™ is not functioning. • If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 171 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* Introduction Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to assist the driver if there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill or one that is moving in the same direction as your vehicle. Collision Warning consists of the following three functions: 04 The system should not be used in such a way that the driver changes his/her way of operating the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on the system, the chances of an accident eventually occurring increase considerably. The Collision Warning and City Safety™ systems supplement each other. See page 167 for detailed information about City Safety™. WARNING • Collision Warning warns the driver of a potential collision situation. • Brake Support helps the driver brake efficiently in a critical situation. • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. For that reason, never test the Auto-brake system by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death. cally if a collision with a pedestrian or another vehicle cannot be avoided and the driver does not apply the brakes in time or steer around the person/vehicle. Autobrake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to assist the driver in all situations. This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary intervention. 172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WARNING • Collision Warning does not work in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions. It does not react to vehicles not traveling in the same direction as your vehicle. • Collision Warning does not react to animals. • Warnings are only provided when the risk of collision is high. The "Function" section provides information about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using Collision Warning. • Collision Warning will not provide a warning or brake the vehicle for pedestrians at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* WARNING • Collision Warning will not provide a warning or brake the vehicle for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area. • The auto-brake function can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at impact but the driver should always apply the brakes for the best possible braking effect, even if auto-brake is actively applying the brakes. • • Never wait for a collision warning. This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed, even when the collision warning system is in use. Maintenance of the Collision Warning system's components must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. Function Brake Support If the risk of collision continues to increase after the collision warning has been given, Brake Support is activated. Brake Support prepares the brake system to react quickly, and the brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug. If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking effect will be provided. Brake Support also increases brake force if the system determines that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal. 04 Auto-brake Function overview Visual warning signal, collision risk Radar sensor Camera Collision Warning The radar sensor and the camera work together to detect a pedestrian, stationary vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there is a risk of collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flashing red warning light and an audible warning signal. Collision warning is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h). If a collision is imminent and the driver has not applied the brakes or begun to steer around the vehicle or pedestrian, the auto-brake function is activated without the driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision occurs or limited brake force is applied if this is sufficient to avoid the collision. NOTE The auto-brake and brake support functions are always on and cannot be turned off. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* Operation Setting a warning distance Settings are made by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and using the menus displayed. This setting determines the distance at which the visual and audible warnings are triggered. Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning Warning distance. On and off 04 To switch Collision Warning on or off, press MY CAR on the center console control panel and go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning. If Collision Warning is on, the system will perform a self-test each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning light. See page 134 for more information about the menu system. The warning distance determines the level of sensitivity used by the system. The warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. Begin by using Long and if the system gives too many warnings, try changing to Normal. WARNING When the engine is switched on, the Collision Warning setting that was being used when it was switched off will be the default setting. • The setting Short should only be used in situations where traffic is light and moving at low speeds. Activating/deactivating warning signals • Collision Warning alerts the driver to the risk of a collision but this function cannot reduce the driver’s reaction time. The collision warning system’s visual signals are activated automatically when the engine is started if the collision warning system is switched on. • The audible warning signal can be activated/ deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Warning sound if risk of collision. 174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. For Collision Warning to be as effective as possible, it is recommended that Distance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see page 164. NOTE • When Adaptive Cruise Control is used, the warning light and signal will be used by that function, even if the warnings provided by Collision Warning have been deactivated by the driver. • In situations where traffic is moving at considerably different speeds, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warnings may be considered to be late, even if the setting Long has been selected. Checking settings The current Collision Warning settings can be checked by pressing MY CAR on the center console control panel and going to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Collision Warning. Limitations Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. For this reason, always activate the audible warning signal. Slippery driving conditions increase braking distance, which can reduce the system's 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* capacity to avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and DSTC systems provide the best possible braking effect while helping to maintain stability. WARNING • • Warnings may not be provided if the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, or if movements of the steering wheel/ brake pedal are great, such as during active driving. NOTE The visual warning signal may be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature due to strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning signal will be used, even if it has been deactivated in the menu system. NOTE In certain situations, the system cannot provide warnings or warnings may be delayed if traffic conditions or other external factors make it impossible for the radar sensor or camera to detect a pedestrian or a vehicle ahead. • • The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and provides warnings and braking effect most effectively at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the system functions best if your vehicle’s speed is below approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles may not be provided in dark conditions or in poor visibility. The Collision Warning system uses the same radar sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 159. If warnings are given too frequently, the warning distance can be reduced (see page 174). This causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the total number of warnings provided. WARNING • The system is not activated at speeds under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). Therefore, it will not brake your vehicle if you approach a vehicle ahead at very low speed, such as when parking. • The driver's actions always have highest priority and override the Collision Warning system. This means that the system will not intervene in situations where the driver is actively steering, braking or pressing the accelerator pedal, even if a collision is imminent. • When Auto-brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle has been braked for a moving vehicle ahead, your vehicle's speed will be reduced to the same speed as that vehicle's. 04 `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* The camera’s limitations The camera is used by Collision Warning with Auto-brake, Driver Alert Control (see page 180), and Lane Departure Warning (see page 183). WARNING • The camera has the same limitations as the human eye. In other words, its “vision is impaired” by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc. These conditions may reduce the function of systems that depend on the camera or cause these systems to temporarily stop functioning. • Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera’s function, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the camera to stop functioning. NOTE • 04 • To help protect the camera in very hot conditions, it may be temporarily switched off for approximately 15 minutes after the engine has been started. Keep the section of the windshield in front of the camera clean and free of ice, snow, or condensation. • Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera’s capacity to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian or another vehicle. Pedestrians The system cannot identify all pedestrians The Collision Warning system can only identify and detect a pedestrian who is standing upright. This person can be standing still, walking or running. This means that the system has to be able to identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's pattern of movement when walking or running. If parts of the body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. The following conditions apply: • In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire 176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* body and the person must be at least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. • The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying a large object. • The camera's capacity to see a pedestrian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the human eye. • The camera's function is deactivated and will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area. WARNING • Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. • The system cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations, such as in darkness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people wearing clothing that obscures the contours of their bodies. Fault tracing and actions If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed, this means that the camera is obscured and cannot detect pedestrians, vehicles or road marker lines in front of the vehicle. This, in turn, means that Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection, Lane Departure Warning, and Driver Alert Control will not have full functionality. The table lists possible causes for this message being displayed, and suitable actions. 04 `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* 04 Cause Action The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera. The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to register visibility. The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is dirty. Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this surface cleaned. Symbols and messages in the display Symbol 178 Message Description Collis'n warning OFF Collision Warning is switched off. This message is displayed when the engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the READ button. Collision warn. Unavailable Collision Warning cannot be activated. This message is displayed when the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the READ button. Auto braking was activated Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the READ button. Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see page 176 for more information on the camera’s limitations. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Collision warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* Symbol Message Description Radar blocked See manual Collision Warning and Auto-brake are temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect other vehicles, see page 159 for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations. Collision warn. Service required Collision Warning and Auto-brake are partially or completely not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display. 04 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System* Introduction The Driver Alert System is designed to help a driver who may be becoming fatigued or who is inadvertently leaving the lane. Driver Alert Control (DAC)– introduction The Driver Alert System consists of two different functions that can be switched on together or separately. WARNING • Driver Alert Control (DAC) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see 04 page 183 When one or both of the functions has been switched on, it is in standby mode and is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h). The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). Both functions use a camera that is dependent on the road/lane being clearly marked by painted lines on each side. This function is intended to alert the driver if his/her driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver is distracted or fatigued. 180 • DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals to help remain alert. • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect the driver’s behavior. In situations of this type, no warning will be provided. Therefore, it is important to take breaks at regular intervals, regardless of whether or not DAC has given a warning. Limitations NOTE The camera has certain limitations, see page 159. WARNING The Driver Alert System does not function in all situations and is designed to be a supplementary aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver’s attention and judgement. DAC is designed to help detect a slowly changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be used on main roads and is not meant for use in city traffic. A camera monitors the painted lines marking the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and compares the direction of the road with the driver’s movements of the steering wheel. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the lane smoothly. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not become erratic. • if the driver is testing the LDW function • in strong crosswinds • on grooved road surfaces. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System* Operating DAC Certain settings can be made from the menu system controlled from the center instrument panel. The current system status can be checked on the trip computer’s display by using the buttons on the left steering wheel lever. Thumb wheel. Turn this wheel until Driver Alert is displayed. The second line shows the alternatives Off, Driver Alert Standby <40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/ h), Unavailable or [-----], i.e., the number of bars. READ button. Confirms and erases a message in the display. WARNING • An alert should be taken seriously since it is sometimes difficult for a driver to realize that he/she is fatigued. • In the event of a warning or if the driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as possible in a safe place and rest. Activating DAC Press MY CAR in the center instrument panel and go to Car settings Driver Alert and select On. See page 133 for more information on the menu system. 04 The function is activated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h). The display will show level markings of 1–5 bars, where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving. If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message Driver Alert, Time for a break is displayed. The warning will be repeated after a short time if the driving pattern remains the same. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System* Symbols and messages in the display Symbol 04 182 Message Description - Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on. - Driver Alert Standby <40 mph (Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h) The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). - Driver Alert Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines. Driver Alert The function is analyzing the driver’s driving pattern. The number of bars varies from 1–5, where a low number of bars indicates erratic driving. A high number of bars indicates stable driving. Driver Alert Time for a break The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 176 for information on the camera’s limitations. Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System* Lane Departure Warning (LDW)– introduction Operation and function If the vehicle’s speed falls below 37 mph (60 km/h), LDW will return to standby mode and Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 mph (65 km/h) will be displayed. If the camera can no longer monitor the road’s side marker lines, Lane Depart Warn Unavailable will be displayed. If the vehicle unexpectedly crosses the lane’s left or right side marker lines, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal. 04 No warning signal will be given in the following situations: This function is designed to help reduce the risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle leaves its lane and there is a risk of driving off the road or into the opposite lane. LDW consists of a camera that monitors the lane’s side marker lines. The driver is alerted by an audible signal if the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the road’s center dividing line. 1 When Increased LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the button on the center console. A light in the button illuminates when the function is on. The trip computer display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby <65 km/h) when the function is in standby mode. When LDW is in standby mode, the function is activated automatically after the camera has monitored the road’s side marker lines and the vehicle’s speed exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h). Lane Depart Warn Available will be displayed. • • • • • The turn signal is being used The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal1 The throttle pedal is pressed quickly1 If the steering wheel is moved quickly1 In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s body to sway See page 176 for information on the camera’s limitations. WARNING The driver will only be warned once for each time the wheels cross a marker line. No alarm will be given if a marker line is between the wheels. sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System* Settings There are two alternatives: Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be made in the menu system by pressing My Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Lane Departure Warning. On at start-up: This selection switches LDW on each time the engine is started. Otherwise, the system will be in the mode that it was in when the engine was switched off. apply. When this setting is being used, the system only needs to monitor lane marker lines on one side of the vehicle to change status to Lane Depart Warn Available. Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function’s sensitivity. Warnings will be given at an earlier stage and fewer limitations 04 Symbols and messages in the display Symbol 184 Message Description Lane departure warning ON/Lane departure warning OFF The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. - Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines. - Lane Depart Warn Standby <40 mph (Lane Depart Warn Standby <65 km/h) The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). - Lane Depart Warn Unavailable The road lacks clear marker lines. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Driver Alert System* Symbol Message Description Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See page 176 for information on the camera’s limitations. Driver Alert Sys Service required The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display. 04 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Park assist* Introduction Function 04 WARNING Park Assist is an information system, NOT a safety system. This system is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. Park assist button The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the button in the center console illuminates when the system is on. • The front park assist system is active from the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approximately 10 mph (15 km/h). It is also active when the vehicle is backing up. • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been selected. 186 Activating/deactivating The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The park assist system is designed to assist you when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc. It utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehicle or an object that may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle. An audible signal and symbols in the audio system’s display indicate the distance to the object. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Press the Park assist button on the center console to temporarily deactivate the system(s). > The indicator light in the button will go out when the system has been deactivated. Park assist will be automatically reactivated the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the button will illuminate). NOTE Park assist is disengaged automatically when the parking brake is applied. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Park assist* Signals from the park assist system Audible signal Rear park assist The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to an object, and becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object in front of or behind the vehicle. If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between front and rear speakers. NOTE View in the display (warning for objects front left/ right rear) 04 The level of the audible signal can be lowered/raised with the infotainment volume control. The level can also be set in the MY CAR menu system, see page 134. Visual indicator The audio system’s display gives an overview of the vehicle’s position in relation to a detected object. The marked sectors in the display indicate that one or more of the sensors has detected an object. The closer the car symbol comes to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the object. If the infotainment system is switched off, the park assist system will not be able to provide a visual indicator. An audible signal will still be provided. If the volume of another source from the audio system is high, this will be automatically lowered. The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal comes from the rear speakers. The system must be deactivated when towing a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park assist system's sensors. NOTE Rear park assist is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Park assist* Front park assist Faults in the system Cleaning the sensors If the information symbol illuminates and Park assist syst Service required is shown on the information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and has been disengaged. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 04 The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the audio system's front speakers. G031402 CAUTION In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system. Location of the front sensors It may not be possible to combine auxiliary headlights and front park assist since these lights could trigger the system's sensors. NOTE Front park assist is deactivated when the parking brake is applied and or when the gear selector is in the P position. Location of the rear sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them 188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Park assist* with water and a suitable car washing detergent. Ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals. NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system. 04 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* Introduction Function PAC also shows guiding lines in the on-screen image to indicate the direction that the vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. 04 If the image on the screen seems too dark, brightness can be increased with the thumb wheel on the lighting panel. WARNING • • • PAC is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver’s attention and judgment. The camera has blind spots where it cannot detect objects or people behind the vehicle. Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle. NOTE The driver sees what is behind the vehicle and if a person or animal should suddenly appear from the side. PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the opening handle. The camera has built-in electronics that help reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image shown on the screen is as natural as possible. This may cause some objects on the screen to “lean,” which is normal. WARNING Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be. 190 Ambient lighting conditions The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This may cause the brightness and quality of the image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitivity to light is increased in dark conditions or in bad weather, which may affect image quality. The Park Assist Camera uses the display in the center console to show the area behind the car while you are backing up. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. In order to function properly, the camera lens should always be kept clean. This is particularly important in bad weather. Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* Using PAC Activation With the camera zoomed in on the trailer hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's path toward the trailer will be projected. This feature can be activated in the MY CAR menu, see page 134. The guiding lines for the wheels (see the following section "Guiding lines") and for the trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same time. Guiding lines If the camera shows an enlarged (zoomed) image, turn TUNE counterclockwise, or press EXIT, CAM or OK to return to a normal view. 04 Deactivation PAC is activated when the gear selector is moved to R if the system is selected in the MY CAR menu system or by pressing the CAM button in the center console. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. If the Volvo Navigation System (VNS) is in use, PAC will automatically override the navigation system to show the camera's image on the screen instead of navigation information, for as long as reverse gear is selected. Zoom The camera can be useful when attaching a trailer. Press CAM to zoom in on the trailer hitch (and press this button again to return to the normal camera view). Move the gear selector from R to another position. There is a slight delay in the PAC system, which means that the view from behind the vehicle will remain on the screen for approximately 15 seconds after the gear selector has been moved from the R position or until the vehicle reaches a forward speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). The screen will then revert to the mode that it was in before R was selected and will, for example, display navigation system information. The lines on the screen are projected as if they were a path on the ground behind the vehicle and are affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel while backing up. NOTE When backing up with a trailer, the guiding lines show the path that the vehicle will take, not the trailer. NOTE If any button on the center console control panel is pressed, the camera image will disappear from the display. Pressing CAM will return the camera image to the display. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* WARNING Keep in mind that the image on the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle. The driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides of the vehicle when turning while backing up. Marker lines 04 The dashed line (2) indicates the clear zone of approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the bumper. These lines also indicate the outmost limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle , even when the it turns. The "wheel tracks" (3) between the side marker lines show where the wheels will roll and can extend up to approximately 10.5 ft (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are no objects in the way. Vehicles equipped with Park Assist The markers change color (from yellow to orange to red) as the vehicle comes closer to the object. Marker (color) Distance to object Yellow more than 5 ft (1.5 m) Orange 5–1 ft (0.3–1.5 m) Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) Settings Press OK/MENU when a normal camera view is displayed and make the desired settings. Parking camera settings • Mark Park Assist lines to display the sidelines while backing up. • Mark Distance information to display the intersecting lines while backing up. The PAC system's lines Activating the system • Mark Automatic to activate PAC each Marker line for a 1-foot (30-centimeter) zone behind the vehicle time reverse gear is selected. Marker line for the clear back-up zone Colored fields (4-one per sensor) indicate distance "Wheel tracks" The solid line (1) indicates a zone within 1 ft (30 centimeters) of the rear bumper. 192 If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Park Assist system, the distance to an object will be indicated more exactly and colored markers in the display indicate which of the sensor(s) has detected the object. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. • Mark Off to turn off PAC completely. Summary • The camera is activated when the gear selector is moved to R (this can be changed in the MY CAR menu) and the 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC)* image is shown on the center console display. • When backing up, two solid lines are projected on the screen to show the path that the vehicle's rear wheels will take. These lines are affected by movements of the steering wheel. The vehicle's approximate outer dimension are shown by two dashed lines. • The graphic lines will not be displayed when backing up with a trailer that is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. • Objects on the ground that are closer than 1 ft (30 centimeters) cannot be detected by the camera. • The camera is active for approx. 5 seconds after the gear selector is moved to R or until the vehicle's speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). • The optional Park Assist sensors and the parking camera work together and information from the sensors is shown graphically on the display. • The graphic lines shown on the screen when the vehicle backs up can be disabled in the settings menu. • Manual zoom can be selected in the MY CAR menu. • The system can be switched off by press- R. This setting can be changed in the in MY CAR menu. • If there are two cameras installed on the vehicle*, to switch between cameras, turn TUNE (at least one of the cameras has to be active), press CAM repeatedly or use the center console controls. If the front camera is on, it overrides the optional park assist system's visual indicator but there will still be an audible signal. 04 Limitations Even if a fairly small section of the screen image appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a relatively large area behind the vehicle is hidden and objects there may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle. NOTE Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's field of view. Keep in mind • Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and snow. Remove ice and snow carefully to avoid scratching the lens. • Clean the lens regularly with warm water and a suitable car washing detergent. ing CAM. By default, the system is activated when the gear selector is moved to * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Blind Spot Information System* Introduction WARNING • BLIS is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system. • BLIS does not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes. • G031404 04 As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes in a safe manner. BLIS camera Indicator light BLIS symbol The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is an information system that indicates the presence of another vehicle moving in the same direction as your vehicle in the side-view mirror's "blind area." CAUTION The system is based on digital camera technology. The cameras are located beneath the side-view mirrors. When one (or both) of the cameras have detected a vehicle in the blind area (up to approximately 10 ft. (3 meters) from the side of your vehicle, and up to approximately 31 ft. (9.5 meters) behind the side-view mirror), see the illustration, the indicator light in the door panel illuminates. The light will glow continuously to alert the driver of the vehicle in the blind area. NOTE The door panel indicator light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time, both lights will illuminate. BLIS has an integrated function that alerts the driver if a fault should occur with the system. For example, if one or both of the system's cameras are obscured, a message (see the table on page 196) will appear in the information display in the instrument panel. If this occurs, clean the camera lenses. If necessary, the system can be temporarily switched off (for instructions, see page 196). The BLIS system should only be repaired by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Areas monitored by BLIS Distance A = approx. 31 ft. (9.5 meters), Distance B = approx. 10 ft. (3 meters) 194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Blind Spot Information System* When does BLIS function Darkness The system functions when your vehicle is moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). BLIS reacts to the headlights of surrounding vehicles. In order to be detected by BLIS, a vehicle in the blind area must have its headlights on. This means, for example, that the system will not detect a trailer without headlights that is being towed behind a car or truck. When you pass another vehicle: The system reacts when you pass another vehicle at a speed of up to 6 mph (10 km/h) faster than that vehicle. WARNING When you are passed by another vehicle: The system reacts if your vehicle is passed by another vehicle at a speed of up to 43 mph (70 km/h) faster than your vehicle. WARNING • • BLIS does not function in sharp curves. • If you are towing a wide trailer, this may prevent the BLIS cameras from detecting other vehicles in adjacent lanes. BLIS does not function when your vehicle is backing up. NOTE • BLIS does not react to cyclists or mopeds. • BLIS does not react to vehicles that are standing still. • The BLIS cameras have the same limitation as the human eye. In other words, their "vision is impaired" by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, intense light directly into the camera, dense fog, etc. If the BLIS indicator lights illuminate occasionally even when there are no other vehicles in the blind area, this does not indicate a fault in the system. In the event of a fault, Blind spot syst. Service required will be displayed. The following are several examples of situations in which the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system. 04 Limitations How BLIS functions in daylight and darkness In certain situations, the BLIS indicator light(s) may illuminate even when there are no other vehicles in the area monitored by the system. Light reflected from a wet road surface Daylight BLIS reacts to the shape of surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to help detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, etc. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Blind Spot Information System* CAUTION 04 The vehicle's own shadow against a large, light, smooth surface such as barriers between lanes on a highway • Clean the lenses carefully to avoid scratching. • The lenses are electrically heated to help melt ice or snow. If necessary, gently brush away snow from the lenses. Switching BLIS on and off switched off, and a text message is displayed. • BLIS can be switched on again by pressing the button. The indicator light in the button will illuminate and a new text message will be displayed. Press the READ button (see page 131) to erase the message. Depending on the vehicle's optional equipment, there may not be space for the BLIS button in the center console. In this case, BLIS can be switched on and off in the menu system by pressing MY CAR and going to Settings Car settings BLIS. See page 134 for a description of the menu system. BLIS system messages Sunlight directly in the camera when the sun is low on the horizon Cleaning the BLIS camera lenses In order to function optimally, the BLIS camera lenses must be kept clean. They can be wiped clean with a soft cloth or wet sponge. 196 BLIS is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on. The indicator lights will provide confirmation by flashing 3 times. • The system can be switched off by press- * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. ing the BLIS button in the center console (see the illustration). The indicator light in the button goes out when the system is Text in the display System status Blind spot syst. Service required BLIS not functioning properly. Contact an authorized Volvo service technician. Blind spot syst. camera blocked BLIS camera obscured. Clean the lenses. Blind-spot info system ON BLIS system on 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Blind Spot Information System* Text in the display System status Blind-spot info system OFF BLIS system off Blind spot syst. Reduced function The BLIS cameras' function has been reduced due to weak or impaired data transfer between the BLIS system's cameras and the vehicle's electrical system. The cameras will reset themselves when this data transfer has returned to normal. 04 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Storage spaces 04 198 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glove compartment Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment Storage compartment, 12-volt socket and AUX input/USB connector* Jacket holder Rear seat cup holders 04 Storage pocket Jacket holder The jacket hanger is located on the inboard side of the front passenger's seat head restraint. It is only intended for hanging light garments. Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) under armrest, AUX input/USB connector. Includes cup holder for driver and passenger, 12-volt socket and small storage compartment. The owner's manual and maps can be kept here. There are also holders for pens and fuel cards. The glove compartment can be locked manually with the key blade, see page 67. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Vanity mirror 12-volt sockets ignition must be in at least mode I, see page 82. The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both the front and rear sockets are used at the same time, the maximum current consumption per socket is 7.5A (90W). Vanity mirror with lighting G031435 G021438 04 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console The auxiliary sockets can also be used to power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from your Volvo retailer. WARNING The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted. Always keep the sockets covered when not in use. G021440 12-volt socket in the cargo area* 12-volt socket in the rear center console The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the 200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure Passenger compartment convenience Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket. NOTE The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery. 04 201 Introduction........................................................................................... Getting started ..................................................................................... General infotainment functions ............................................................ Radio..................................................................................................... Media player......................................................................................... AUX/USB sockets................................................................................. 204 206 211 214 223 227 Bluetooth media ................................................................................. 230 Bluetooth® hands-free connection ...................................................... Cell phone voice control....................................................................... Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* ........................................................... Remote control*.................................................................................... Infotainment system menus ................................................................. 202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233 241 245 254 256 INFOTAINMENT 05 Infotainment Introduction General information The infotainment system in your vehicle is available in two versions: High Performance Multimedia • 7" color TFT display • Voice control1 • Thumb wheel on the steering wheel key- • • • • AUX and USB sockets Audyssey MultEQ3 Bluetooth hands-free/streaming 12 speakers 5x130W amplifier Dolby Pro Logic pad 05 • • • • • • • AM/FM/HD radio2 The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used to optimize sound quality to help ensure a world-class listening experience. Sirius satellite radio* CD/DVD (mp3 and wma file formats) AUX and USB sockets Using the infotainment system Bluetooth hands-free/streaming 8 speakers 4x40W amplifier Premium Sound Multimedia • 7" color TFT display • Voice control1 • Thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes stereo sound's two channels to the left/right and front/ rear speakers. symbol are Dolby Pro Logic II and the trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. • AM/FM/HD radio2 • Sirius satellite radio* • CD/DVD (mp3 and wma file formats) 1 2 3 204 Only available on models equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System. U.S. models only Applies only to models with Premium Sound Multimedia. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. If the infotainment system is on when the ignition is switched off, it will come on automatically the next time the ignition is put in mode I or higher and continue using the same source (FM1, etc.) that was in use when the ignition was switched off (the driver's door must also be closed on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). The infotainment system can be operated without a key in the ignition slot for 15 minutes at a time by pressing the On/Off button. 05 Infotainment Introduction While the engine is being started, the infotainment system will be temporarily interrupted and will resume when the engine has started. NOTE To help avoid excessive battery drain, remove the remote key from the ignition slot if the infotainment system is used while the engine is switched off. 05 205 05 Infotainment Getting started Infotainment system overview 05 Operating the system Sockets for external audio sources (AUX and USB) Short press: switch the system ON. Press and hold: switch the system OFF. Steering wheel keypad Infotainment system mode buttons (RADIO, MEDIA, or TEL). Press a button to access the desired mode and press the same button again to access the mode's menus. Release the button and wait several seconds to automatically accept your selection. You can also navigate in the menus by turning TUNE to make a selection and pressing OK/MENU to confirm your selection. 7" display Center console control panel Turn TUNE to navigate among the menu alternatives in the display (FM1, DISC, etc.), or to quickly scroll among tracks, folders or radio stations. 1 206 Sirius Satellite radio * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Infotainment mode buttons Press a button to select a mode RADIO: use to select AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1*1, SAT2*1 MEDIA: use to select DISC, AUX, USB, iPod or Bluetooth*. TEL: Bluetooth® hands-free cell phone operation MY CAR – See page 133. 05 Infotainment Getting started Basic infotainment functions TUNE: Turn in either direction to manually tune a radio station or navigate among the menu alternatives shown on the display. OK/MENU: Press to confirm a selection or access the menus for the currently selected infotainment system mode (you can also choose to wait several seconds to automatically accept your selection). Controls in the center console for basic infotainment functions SOUND: press this button to access the menu for adjusting bass, treble, etc. See page 212 for additional information. VOL: Turn to raise or lower the volume level. Short press: switch the system ON. Press and hold: switch the system OFF. A short press when the infotainment system is on will mute/unmute the infotainment system sound. EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, interrupt the current function, reject an incoming phone call or erase any characters entered in the display. From the highest level in the current menu, press and hold to go to the infotainment system's main menu view (see page 208). INFO: Press this button to display additional information about a function, song, etc. See page 211 for more information. FAV: This button can be used to store a shortcut to a commonly used function in AM/FM/SIRIUS/DISC, etc. See the section "FAV—storing a shortcut" on page 211 for information on using this button. Views in the display General information The infotainment system displays information in four different views. The highest (most general) level is called the main view and is common to all system modes (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). Each mode has three different basic views: • Normal view: the default view for that particular mode • Quick scroll view: the view displayed when TUNE is turned, which allows you to e.g., change tracks on a CD, change radio stations, etc. • Menu view: a view for navigating and mak- 05 ing selections in the mode's menu system. The views in the different modes vary depending on the mode selected, the vehicle's equipment, current settings, etc. Number key pad (used to e.g., select a preset radio station, enter letter/numbers when using a Bluetooth cell phone, etc. `` 207 05 Infotainment Getting started Main view the display (2) (for example, FM1) and press the thumb wheel to confirm your choice. Press and hold EXIT to go back. NAV: Navigation system* RADIO: Radio MEDIA: Media (DISC, USB, etc.) Example of RADIO mode's normal view Example of RADIO mode's main view Modes (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA etc.), see the following table. 05 Source menu, e.g., (FM1, DISC, etc.). Example of Bluetooth hands-free mode's menu view Press and hold EXIT on the steering wheel keypad to display the main view (see the illustration). This offers a quick way of changing modes (RADIO, MEDIA etc.) directly from the steering wheel keypad without taking your hands off the steering wheel. This can also be done using the mode buttons on the center console control panel. • Select a mode (1) by turning the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad. Press the thumb wheel to confirm your choice. • After selecting a mode, turn the thumb wheel to one of the mode's alternatives in 208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. TEL: Bluetooth hands-free MY CAR: Driving-related settings CAM: Park assist camera* 05 Infotainment Getting started Steering wheel keypad Thumb wheel, used to scroll in the menus shown on the display. Press the thumb wheel to e.g., confirm a menu selection or to answer an incoming call on a Bluetoothconnected cell phone. Mute entered in the display. A long press takes you to the main menu view (see page 208). Thumb wheel, used to scroll in the menus shown on the display. Press the thumb wheel to e.g., confirm a menu selection or to answer an incoming call on a Bluetoothconnected cell phone. Voice control (for operating Bluetoothconnected cell phones and the optional navigation system) Rear control panel with headphone sockets* Standard steering wheel keypad Left/right arrow keys: A short press moves between preset radio stations or tracks on a disc. Press and hold to search within tracks or to tune to the next/previous strong radio station. Volume EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, interrupt the current function, reject an incoming phone call or erase any characters entered in the display. Press and hold to go to the highest level in the current menu. From the highest level in the current menu, press and hold to go to the infotainment system's main menu view (see page 208). 2 Steering wheel keypad with voice control button2 Headphones with an impedance of 16 – 32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduction. 05 Left/right arrow keys: A short press moves between preset radio stations or tracks on a disc. Press and hold to search within tracks or to tune to the next/previous strong radio station. Volume EXIT: Go higher in the menu system, interrupt the current function, reject an incoming phone call or erase any characters Models equipped with the optional navigation system only `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209 05 Infotainment Getting started Scroll/search forward and back Press briefly on (2) to scroll between CD tracks/ audio files or to search for the next available radio station. Limitations NOTE Volume control (right/left sides) • The sound source (AM, FM1, Disc, etc.) being played through the infotainment system's speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel. • In order to select and play an external device using MODE, the device must be connected to the infotainment system. Scroll/search forward and back 05 MODE – select: AM, FM1, FM2,HD Radio3, Sirius1*, Sirius2*, Disc, USB, iPod, Bluetooth, AUX and ON/OFF. Headphones sockets (3.5 mm) Activating/deactivating The control panel is activated by pressing MODE when the audio system is switched on. It is switched off automatically when the audio system is switched off or by a long press on MODE. 3 210 U.S. models only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment General infotainment functions FAV—storing a shortcut • iPod • Bluetooth* • AUX INFO—displaying additional information Favorites can also be stored for TEL, MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. See page 133 for a description of the menu system. To program a function on the FAV button: 1. Select a mode (e.g., RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). 2. Select a waveband or function (AM, Disc, etc.). The FAV button can be used to store frequently used functions, making it possible to start the stored function by simply pressing FAV. One favorite (for example, Equalizer) can be programmed for each of the following infotainment system functions: In RADIO mode • AM • FM1/FM2 • SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2* 3. Press and hold FAV until the mode/function's "favorite" menu is displayed. 4. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of alternatives displayed and press OK/ MENU to confirm (store) your choice. > The next time the infotainment system mode (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.) is selected, a short press on FAV will start the stored function. In certain cases, more information may be available (about a radio station, song, artist, etc.) than is currently displayed on the screen. Press the INFO button to display all of the available information. 05 A favorite function can also be programmed using the MY CAR menu system. See page 134 for more information. In MEDIA mode • DISC • USB `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 05 Infotainment General infotainment functions Basic sound settings Press SOUND to display the basic sound setting menu (Bass, Treble, etc). Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display the other setting alternatives. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the new setting by pressing OK/MENU. Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to display: • Surround:1 Can be set to On or Off. When switched on, the system will automatically select settings for the best sound quality, which is normally DPLII and will appear in the display. If the recording was made using Dolby Digital technology, playback will be provided with this setting and will appear in the display. If Surround is switched off, audio will be provided using 3 channel stereo. 05 • Bass: Bass level. • Treble: Treble level. • Fader: Balance between the front and rear speakers. • Balance: Balance between the right and left speakers. 1 2 212 • Subwoofer*: subwoofer volume level. • DPL II center level/3 channel center level1: Volume for the center speaker. • DPL II surround level1 (only when Surround is on): Surround level. Advanced sound settings Equalizer Sound levels for different frequencies can be adjusted separately using this feature. To do so: 1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio settings and select Equalizer 2. Turn TUNE to select one of the frequencies and press OK/MENU. 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the sound setting and confirm the change by pressing OK/ MENU. Do the same for the other frequencies. 4. When you have finished making your settings, press EXIT to save. Sound stage2 The sound experience can be optimized for the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. If the front and rear seats are occupied, the Premium Sound Multimedia only Premium Sound Multimedia only * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. sound stage setting Front seats is recommended. Select one of the options under Audio settings Sound stage. Audio volume and automatic volume control The infotainment system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume according to the speed of the vehicle. The level of sound compensation can be set at low, medium, high or off. Select the level under Audio settings Volume compensation. External audio source volume If an external devices such as an MP3 player or an iPod is connected to the AUX socket, the device's volume may be different from the volume of the internal sound sources such as the disc player or the radio. If the external sound source's volume is too high, the quality of the sound may be impaired. To help prevent this, adjust the input volume of the external audio source: 05 Infotainment General infotainment functions NOTE Sound quality may be affected if the MP3 player is being charged while the system is in AUX mode. To help prevent this, avoid charging the MP3 player in a 12-volt socket while it is being played. intended to enable the user to adapt sound reproduction to his/her personal tastes. 1. Press MEDIA and turn TUNE to AUX. Press OK/MENU or wait for several seconds. 2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to AUX input volume. Confirm by pressing OK/ MENU. 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume. 05 Optimal sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimal sound reproduction using digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account factors such as the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, the listeners' seating positions, etc., for each combination of vehicle/infotainment system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into consideration the volume level, radio reception, and the speed of the vehicle. The settings that are described in this manual, (Bass, Treble, Equalizer etc.) are only 213 05 Infotainment Radio General functions Selecting a station (in wavebands AM/ FM1/FM2) Automatic tuning NOTE • This list will only display the frequencies of the stations currently being received, not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the currently selected waveband. • If the signal from the currently tuned station is weak, this may prevent the radio from updating the list of stations. while the list If this occurs, press of stations is displayed to switch to manual tuning mode and select a station. If the list of stations is no longer displayed, turn TUNE in either direction to display the list again and press . 1. Press RADIO. Continue pressing this button to toggle to the desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). 2. Release the button and wait several seconds or press OK/MENU. 3. Press the left or right arrow keys on the center console control panel to search for the next available station. 05 RADIO button for selecting the AM, FM1, FM2, Sirius1* or Sirius2* wavebands. Number key buttons (0-9) Navigate among the menu alternatives in the display by turning TUNE. Confirm your selection or access the radio menus by pressing OK/MENU. Left/right arrow keys: Press and hold to go to the next/previous strong station, press briefly to tune to a preset station. RADIO menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad. See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system. 214 List of stations (in wavebands FM1/FM2 only) The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest FM stations whose signals are currently being received. This enables you to find stations when driving in areas where radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar. To access this list: 1. Select the desired waveband (FM1 or FM2). 2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. This displays the list of stations in the area. The currently tuned station will be indicated in the list by magnified text. 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to select a station on the list. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. The list will disappear from the display after several seconds. If the station list is no longer displayed, turn on the TUNE in either direction and press number key pad on the center console to switch to manual tuning (or to switch back from manual tuning to the "list of stations" function). Manual tuning By default, the list of stations of the strongest stations in the area will be displayed when you turn TUNE (see the preceding section, "List of stations"). While the list of stations is displayed, 05 Infotainment Radio press on the number key pad on the center console to switch to manual tuning, which enables you to select a frequency from the complete list of all radio frequencies available on the currently selected waveband. In other words, in manual tuning mode, turning TUNE one step will change from e.g., 93.3 to 93.5, etc.). To manually tune a station: 1. Press RADIO. Continue pressing this button to toggle to the desired waveband (AM, FM1, etc.) and wait for several seconds or press OK/MENU to confirm. 2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency been stored on the number key button used. NOTE The radio is initially set to automatically search for stations in the area in which you are driving (see the preceding section, "List of stations"). However, if you have switched to manual tuning (by pressing on the number key pad on the center console while the list of stations is displayed), the radio will remain in manual tuning mode the next time it is switched on. To switch back to "list of stations" mode, turn TUNE one step (to display . the full list of stations) and press Please note that if you press when the list of stations is not displayed, this will activate the INFO function (see page 211 for more information about this function). Storing preset stations Ten preset stations can be stored for each waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). Stored preset stations are selected using the number key buttons on the center console. Manually storing preset stations 1. Tune to a station (see "Selecting a station"). 2. Hold in one of the number key buttons. > The sound will be muted for several seconds and when it returns, the station has A list of preset stations can be displayed. This function can be activated/deactivated in AM/ FM mode in FM menu Show presets or in AM menu Show presets Scan The function automatically searches the current waveband for radio stations. When a station is found, it is played for several seconds before scanning is resumed. While the station is playing it can be stored as a preset in the usual way (see "Manually storing preset stations"). 05 To start scanning in AM/FM mode, go to FM menu Scan or in AM menu Scan. Stop station scanning by pressing EXIT. NOTE Storing a station interrupts the SCAN function. Radio text Some stations transmit information on program content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the display. `` 215 05 Infotainment Radio Activate/deactivate in FM mode under Show radio text. HD Radio reception (U.S. models only) Introduction 05 Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast NOTE HD radio volume may fade in and out at times due to coverage limitations. developer of a broadcasting technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to the method of transmitting a digital radio broadcast signal centered on the same frequency as the AM or FM station's present frequency. The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" since it is both analogue and digital. During hybrid operation, receivers still continue to receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD radio receivers incorporate both modes of reception, where the receiver will automatically switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the symbol will appear in the audio system display. The symbol is "grayed-out" when HD Radio is in standby mode and white when the radio is actively receiving an HD broadcast. More information about HD radio and IBOC can be found on Ibiquity's website, www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. Benefits of digital broadcasting • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality and AM as analogue FM). HD radio is a brand name registered by the Ibiquity digital corporation1. They are the 1 216 • Some FM frequencies offer a greater number of listening choices through “multicasting” (consisting of a frequency's main channel and any sub-channels that may also be available on that particular frequency. See also the section "Sub-channels" below). • When receiving a digital signal there is no multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ crackling due to outside influences. How HD broadcasting works HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio and broadcasts of this type are available in many areas of the United States. However, there are a few key differences: • Instead of transmitting one analogue signal, stations send out a bundled signal – both analogue and digital. • An HD radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending on the terrain and location of the vehicle (which will influence the signal strength), the receiver will determine which signal to receive. Limitations • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM only): The main channel is the only channel that can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and analogue). If a frequency has subchannels, they are broadcast in digital mode only. The main FM channel will be HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. 05 Infotainment Radio displayed as, for example, 93.9 WNYC (Volvo uses the symbol ">" to indicate there are sub-channels available) The subFM channels will be displayed as 93.9 – 2 WNYC, 93.9 - 3 WNYC, etc. • Reception coverage area: Due to current IBOC transmitter power limitations, the reception coverage area in digital mode is somewhat more limited than the station's analogue coverage area. Please be aware that as with any radio broadcast technology, terrain, time of day, foliage level and building location can have positive or negative effects on radio reception. • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue blending: Analogue to digital blending will occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal. NOTE There may be a noticeable difference in sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such as: • • Volume increase or decrease • Time alignment (Digital program material in extreme cases can be as much as 8 seconds behind the analogue). This will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ Treble cut or boost The above items are dependant on the broadcaster's equipment settings and do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio receiver or antenna systems. Switching HD on or off 3. Turn TUNE and move the marker to HD Radio. 4. Press OK/MENU to turn HD off (the X will disappear from the box on the display screen). This will disable the radio's capability to receive digital broadcasts but it will continue to function as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is switched off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-channels (see the following section for a more detailed explanation of sub-channels). Repeat steps 2-4 above to reactivate HD (an X will appear in the box on the display screen). Please note that this will only switch HD on or off for the selected waveband (AM, FM1, etc.). 05 Sub-channels The factory setting for HD radio is off. However, when driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. To do so: 1. Be sure the audio system is switched on and in one of the AM or FM modes. 2. Press OK/MENU in the center console control panel. Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels `` 217 05 Infotainment Radio In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM wavebands only) will also have sub-channels offering additional types of programming or music. • In such cases, the “-” symbol will be displayed to the left of the frequency number and a number will be displayed to the right of the frequency number indicating that the currently tuned frequency has at least one sub-channel. The "2" in the illustration indicates that you are currently listening to the first sub-channel on frequency 93.9. Selecting sub-channels 05 To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), press and hold the right arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. To go back to the main channel, press and hold the left arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. To go to subchannel 2 (if available), press and hold the right arrow key on the center console or on the steering wheel keypad for approximately 1 second. If you are currently tuned to a frequency's main channel, pressing and holding the left arrow key for approximately 1 second will tune to the next lower radio frequency. 218 • NOTE Sirius satellite radio* When the radio has gone into HD mode, it may take several seconds before the ">" symbol (if the current frequency has any sub-channels) is displayed to the left of the frequency. Pressing and holding the arrow keys for approximately 1 second before the main-/sub-channel icon is displayed will cause the radio to tune to the next available radio station, not to the current station's sub-channels. Listening to satellite radio When you are no longer in broadcasting range of the currently tuned sub-channel, No reception will be displayed. The radio will then be muted and it will be necessary to tune to or search for a new radio station. The Sirius satellite system consists of a number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit. NOTE • The digital signals from the Sirius satellites are line-of-sight, which means that physical obstructions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere with signal reception. • Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other antennas that may impede signals from the SIRIUS satellites. Sub-channels can also be stored as presets, see page 215 for information on storing stations. Selecting Sirius radio mode If you press a sub-channel's preset button, it may take up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audible. If you press this button while you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No HD reception will be displayed. 2. Continue pressing RADIO (or turn TUNE to scroll) to select SAT 1 or SAT 2 and press OK/MENU (or wait for several seconds). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 1. With the infotainment system switched on, press RADIO. Activating Sirius radio 1. Tune to a satellite channel that has no audio, which means that the channel is unsubscribed and the text Subscription 05 Infotainment Radio > The channels in the selected category are displayed. update needed is displayed (see also "Selecting a channel"). 2. Call Sirius at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474). 3. If you tune to an unsubscribed channel, the Sirius ID will be displayed. The Sirius ID can also be accessed from the menu (press OK/MENU, turn TUNE to scroll to the Advanced settings menu, press OK/ MENU, scroll to SIRIUS ID and press OK/ MENU to display the number). 4. Updating subscription will be displayed while the subscription is being updated, after which the display will return to the normal view. NOTE • The category All is default, which enables you to scroll through the entire list of available satellite channels. • The channel categories are automatically updated several times a year. This takes approximately two minutes and will interrupt normal broadcasting. A message will be displayed while updating is in progress. Information on channel or feature updates is available at www.sirius.com. SIRIUS ID The SIRIUS ID (sometimes referred to as the Electronic Serial Number or ESN) is required when contacting the Sirius Call Center. It is used to activate your account and when making any account transactions. Selecting a channel Selecting a channel category • By turning the TUNE control and selecting 1. Turn TUNE to display a list of channels. 2. Press EXIT. 3. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of categories and press OK/MENU to make a selection. There are three ways of tuning in a channel: • Using the left and right arrow keys to go to the next channel. Skipped channels (see page 221) will be excluded. a channel from the list • Through direct channel entry. NOTE • The numbers of skipped or locked channels will not be displayed. • If a channel is locked, the access code must be entered before the channel can be selected. See "Unlocking a channel" on page 221. Direct channel entry The Sirius satellite channels are in numerical order throughout all of the categories. To access a channel directly: 1. Turn TUNE to access the channel list. 2. Use the number key buttons to enter the channel's number. 05 3. Press OK/MENU. The radio will tune to this channel, even if it belongs to a category other than the currently selected one. Scanning SCAN automatically searches through the list of satellite channels. The search will only be carried out in the selected category, see page 215 for more detailed information on the scan function. Storing a channel A total of 20 satellite channels can be stored; 10 channels each for Sirius 1 and 2, see `` 219 05 Infotainment Radio page 215 for detailed information on storing channels. 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song memory and press OK/MENU. • A long press on one of the number keys 3. Turn TUNE to scroll to Song Seek and press OK/MENU to activate or deactivate the function. stores the currently tuned channel on that key. • A short press on a number key while the radio is in SAT 1 or SAT 2 mode will tune to the preset satellite channel stored on that button, regardless of the currently selected channel category. Searching for and storing songs The Song Seek function provides notification 05 when Sirius is broadcasting the songs selected in song memory. Song memory enables you to store the name of the song for future advance notification when that song is being played. Song seek When a satellite radio channel plays one of the songs stored in the song memory while the Song seek feature is activated, the listener will be alerted by a text message and an audible signal. Press OK/MENU to listen to the song or EXIT to cancel. To activate/deactivate the song seek function: 1. Press OK/MENU. 220 Radio text This text provides information about the song that is currently playing. To turn this feature on or off, press OK/MENU and scroll to Show radio text and press OK/MENU to toggle between on or off. NOTE When the song has ended, the radio will remain tuned to the channel on which the song was played. Advanced Sirius settings This menu function enables you to make settings on certain Sirius satellite radio functions. To access this menu: Song memory 1. Press OK/MENU. Up to ten songs can be saved in the system's memory. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu and press OK/MENU. To add the currently playing song to the list: 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Scroll to Song memory and press OK/ MENU. WARNING Settings should be made when the vehicle is at a standstill. 3. Scroll to Add current song to song memory and press OK/MENU. The following settings can be made in the Sirius menu: If a new song is selected when the memory is full, you will be prompted to delete a song from the list. To do so: • Channel skip settings can be made • Channel lock settings can be made • The channel access code can be displayed 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to scroll through the list of songs. Select a song and press OK/ MENU to delete it from the list. or changed (see also "Locking a channel" on page 221) • Your Sirius ID can be displayed • Reset Sirius settings 05 Infotainment Radio Skip options This function is used to remove a channel from the list of available channels. Skipping a channel 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. 3. Press OK/MENU to enter the Skip options menu. 4. Press OK/MENU to enter Channel skip list. be skipped the next time the ignition is switched on. Channel lock Access to specific channels can be restricted (locked). A locked channel will not provide audio, song titles, or artist information. NOTE 7. Press OK/MENU to select Lock all channels in the category or turn TUNE to scroll to a channel and press OK/ MENU to select it. Multiple channels can be selected. The selected channel is now locked and a checked box will be displayed to indicate this. It will be necessary to enter the channel access code2 in order to listen to a locked channel. All channels are initially unlocked. Unlocking a channel 5. Press OK/MENU to select All categories or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and press OK/MENU to select it. 1. Press OK/MENU. A channel's access code2 is required to unlock a channel. 2. Scroll to the Advanced settings menu. Unlock all channels 6. Press OK/MENU to select Skip all channels in the category or turn TUNE to scroll to a channel and press OK/ MENU to select or deselect it. Multiple channels can be selected. 3. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to scroll to the Lock options menu and press OK/ MENU. Locking a channel Unskip all channels 4. Use the number keys in the central control panel to enter the channel access code2 and press OK/MENU. This removes all channels from the skip list and makes them available for selection. 5. Press OK/MENU to enter the Channel lock list. Temporary unskip all channels 6. Press OK/MENU to select All categories or turn TUNE to scroll to a category and press OK/MENU to select it. This function will temporarily unskip all channels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the skip list and will again This permanently removes all channels from the locked list and makes them available for selection. 05 Temporarily unlock all channels This function will temporarily unlock all channels and make them available for selection. The channels remain on the locked list and will again be locked the next time the ignition is switched on. CHANGE CODE This function makes it possible to change the channel access code. The default code is 0000. To change the code: 2 The default code is 0000. If you have changed the code and forgotten it, see the section "If you have forgotten the access code." `` 221 05 Infotainment Radio 1. Select Change code in theLock options menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Enter the new code and press OK/MENU. 3. Confirm the new code and press OK/ MENU. If an incorrect code is entered, the text Incorrect code is displayed. If you have forgotten the access code: 1. Select SIRIUS ID in the Advanced settings menu and press OK/MENU. 2. Press and hold the OK/MENU button for several seconds. 05 3. The current code will be displayed. Your Volvo retailer can also provide you with assistance. SIRIUS ID This function displays the 12-digit Sirius activation ID. 222 05 Infotainment Media player CD/DVD functions The media player supports and can play the following main types of discs and files: • Purchased CDs (CD Audio) • Home-burned CDs with audio and /or video files • Home-burned DVDs with audio and /or video files • Purchased DVDs See page 226 for a list of compatible formats. Center console control panel Disc slot MEDIA button Eject Number keys TUNE:Turn to navigate among menu selections/folders/tracks. OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selection or access the menus for the currently selected source (e.g., DISC).Left/right arrow keys: Fast back/forward and change track or chapter1. Forward/back and change tracks or chapter. 1 Media menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad. See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system. Playing a disc Press MEDIA several times until Disc is displayed. Release the button and wait several seconds or press OK/MENU. If there is a disc in the player, it will begin playing automatically. Otherwise, Insert disc will be displayed. Insert the disc into the slot with the text side upward and it will begin playing automatically. If a disc with audio/video files is inserted, its folder structure will be read by the system. It may take several seconds until the disc begins playing, depending on its quality and the amount of information it contains. Disc eject For reasons of traffic safety, an ejected disc must be removed within 12 seconds or it will be automatically drawn back into the slot. Pause When the audio system volume is turned off completely, the player will pause and will resume playing when the volume is turned up again. Navigating a disc and playing tracks CD audio discs Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to confirm a choice and begin listening. Press EXIT to cancel. Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's root level. 05 / buttons on the center console or The steering wheel keypad can also be used to change tracks. Home-burned CD/DVD audio/video files Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to confirm a choice and begin listening. Use EXIT to stop or to go back in the disc's folder structure. Press and hold EXIT to return to the playlist's root level. DVDs only `` 223 05 Infotainment Media player The / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad can also be used to change audio/video files. The following symbols are used in the display: • • • 05 - audio files - video files NOTE Video images will only be visible when the vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is traveling faster than approximately 4 mph (6 km/h), No visual media available while driving will be displayed. Sound from the film will still be audible and video images will be shown again when the vehicle stops. - folders When a file has been played, the player will continue to play the rest of the files (of the same type) in the current folder. When all of the files in the folder have been played, the player will automatically go to the next folder and play the files in it (unless Repeat folder is activated). The system automatically detects and changes settings if a disc containing only audio or only video files is inserted in the player and will play these files. However, the system will not change settings if a disc containing both audio and video files is inserted and the player will continue to play the current type of file. NOTE Some copy protected audio files or homeburned audio files may not be read by the player. DVD videos See page 225 for information. Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the / buttons to fast forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for audio files but several speeds can be chosen for video files. Press the / buttons several times to increase the speed. Release the button to return to normal viewing speed. Gracenote track identification If the vehicle is equipped with the optional navigation system, this system uses a hard drive containing a database that recognizes music 2 224 Not video DVDs on audio CDs. The database contains songs that are currently popular. If the media player finds a track in the database, the album title and artist's name are displayed, and the title, artist and album for each song is also displayed. If the current audio CD is not found in the database, CD text from the disc is used. If no CD text is available, only track 1, track 2, etc., will be displayed. Scan2 This function plays the first ten seconds of each track/audio file. To start scanning: 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to Scan. > The first ten seconds of each track/ audio file will be played. 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The current track/audio file will continue playing. Random2 This function plays the tracks in random order (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to tracks in random order: 1. Press OK/MENU, 2. Turn TUNE to Random 05 Infotainment Media player 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the random play function. / buttons on the center conPress the sole or steering wheel keypad to change tracks/audio files. Repeat folder3 This function makes it possible to play files in a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been played, the first file will begin again. To activate: NOTE Video images will only be visible when the vehicle is not moving. When the vehicle is traveling faster than approximately 4 mph (6 km/h), No visual media available while driving will be displayed. Sound from the film will still be audible and video images will be shown again when the vehicle stops. Navigating in a DVD's menus 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder. 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function. Play Buttons in the center console control panel, shown above, are used to navigate in a DVD's menus. Changing chapters or titles Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate among them (if a film is playing, it will 3 Turn TUNE to select a title and press OK/ MENU to confirm and return to the list of chapters. Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal view (without having made a selection). Changing chapters or title TurnTUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate in this list (the film will pause if it is currently playing). Press OK/MENU to choose a chapter and return to the normal view in the display (if a film was playing, it will resume). Press EXIT to access the list of titles. 05 In the list of titles, turn TUNE to make a selection and press OK/MENU to confirm. This also returns you to the list of chapters. Press EXIT to cancel and return to the normal view (without having made a selection). Playing video DVDs When playing a video DVD, a disc menu may appear on the display, giving you access to extra functions and settings such as choice of subtitle and language, scene selection, etc. be paused). Press OK/MENU to select a chapter and return to the normal view. If a film was playing, it will resume). Press EXIT to access the list of titles. It is also possible to change chapters by press/ on the center console control ing panel or on the steering wheel keypad. Advanced settings Angle If the DVD supports this function, it is possible to select a camera angle for a certain scene. Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only. `` 225 05 Infotainment Media player This can be done in DVD mode under DVD root menu Advanced settings Angle. To return to the factory settings, select Reset . DivX Video On Demand Compatible formats The media player can be registered to play DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or USB. The registration code can be found by pressing the MY CAR button, and going to Settings Information DivX® VOD code. See page 133 for more information about the menu system. The media player can play a number of different types of files and disc formats, and is compatible with the formats listed in the following table. See also www.divx.com/vod for more information. Screen settings 05 Screen settings can be made (when the vehicle is not moving) for: • Brightness • Contrast 1. PressOK/MENU and choose Image settings and confirm by pressing OK/ MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to the desired setting and press OK/MENU. 3. Change the setting by turning TUNE and confirm the change by pressing OK/ MENU. Press OK/MENU or EXIT to return to the screen settings list. 226 NOTE Dual format (double-sided discs) such as DVD Plus or CD-DVD are thicker than normal discs and may not play in your infotainment system. If a disc containing both CDDA and MP3 tracks is played, all MP3 tracks will be ignored. Audio formats Video formats CD-Audio, mp3, wma, aac, m4a CD-Video, DVD-Video, divx, avi, asf 05 Infotainment AUX/USB sockets Connecting external devices 1. Press MEDIA several times to come to the desired source (iPod, USB or AUX). Release the button and wait for several seconds or press OK/MENU. > For example, if a USB device has been selected, the text Connect USB will be displayed. 2. Connect the device to one of the sockets in the center console storage compartment (see the illustration). Sockets for auxiliary devices in the storage compartment between the front seats An auxiliary device, such as an iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the audio system via one of the sockets in the center console storage compartment. A device connected to the USB socket can be operated using the vehicle's infotainment system controls. An iPod or an MP3 player with rechargeable batteries will also be charged if the device is connected to the USB socket (if the vehicle's ignition is on or if the engine is running). To connect a device: 1 The text Reading USB will be displayed while the system reads the device's folders. This may take a short time, depending on the folder structure and the number of files. When this information has been loaded, track information will be displayed and a track can be selected. Tracks can be selected in two ways: • Turn TUNE and press OK/MENU • Use the right or left arrow keys ( / ) on the center console control panel or on the steering wheel keypad NOTE • The system supports a number of iPod models produced in 2005 or later. • In order to help avoid damage to the USB socket, it will be switched off if there is a short circuit or if the connected device uses too much current (which can happen if the device does not comply with the USB standard). The USB socket will reactivate the next time the ignition is switched on if the problem no longer exists. If the problem persists, contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. 05 MEDIA menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad. See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system. Navigating and playing tracks1 Turn TUNE to access the device's playlist and to navigate in this list. Press OK/MENU to either select a sub-folder or confirm a choice and begin playback. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist or to go back in the folder structure. Press and hold EXIT to go to the highest level in the playlist. USB and iPod only `` 227 05 Infotainment AUX/USB sockets 05 The / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad can also be used to change tracks/files. for video files. Press the / buttons several times to increase the speed. Release the button to return to normal viewing speed. The following symbols are used in the display: Scan1 • • • This function plays the first ten seconds of each track/audio file. To start scanning: - audio files - video files - folders When a file has been played, the player will continue to play the rest of the files (of the same type) in the current folder. When all of the files in the folder have been played, the player will automatically go to the next folder1 (unless Repeat folder is activated) and play the files in it. The system automatically detects and changes settings if a device containing only audio or only video files is connected to the USB socket and will play these files. However, the system will not change settings if the device contains both audio and video files and will continue to play the current type of file. Fast forward/reverse1 Press and hold the / buttons to fast forward/reverse. This is done at one speed for audio files but several speeds can be chosen 1 2 228 USB and iPod only USB only 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to Scan. > The first ten seconds of each track/ audio file will be played. 3. Stop scanning by pressing EXIT. The current track/audio file will continue playing. Random1 This function plays the tracks in random order (shuffle). The random tracks/sound files can be scrolled through in the normal way. To listen to tracks in random order: 1. Press OK/MENU, Search1 The keypad in the center console can be used to search for a file in the currently selected folder. Start the search by either turning TUNE (to access the folders) or by pressing one of the character keys to enter a letter/number. Possible search results will be displayed as characters are entered. Play the file by pressing OK/MENU. Repeat2 This function makes it possible to play files in a folder repeatedly. When the last file has been played, the first file will begin again. To activate: 1. Press OK/MENU. 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder. 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the function. 2. Turn TUNE to Random 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate the random play function. Press the / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad to change tracks/audio files. External sound sources USB flash drive To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is advisable to only store music files on the drive. It will take considerably longer for the system 05 Infotainment AUX/USB sockets to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible music files. NOTE • • The system supports removable media that uses the USB 2.0 standard and the FAT32 file system. It can index up to 1,000 folders and a maximum of 254 sub-folders/files for each folder. However, the highest folder level can support up to 1,000 sub-folders/files. When using a longer type of USB device, connecting it with a USB adapter cable will help reduce mechanical wear on the USB socket and on the device. USB hub A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket, making it possible to connect several USB devices at the same time. To select one of the devices, go to the menu USB menu Select USB device iPod An iPod receives current and its battery is charged through the USB cable. The system will only play audio files from an iPod. NOTE When an iPod is used as a sound source, the vehicle's audio system has a menu structure similar to the one in the iPod. See the iPod's manual for detailed information. Compatible file formats via the USB socket The following audio and video files are supported by the system when playing a device connected to the USB socket. Audio formats mp3, wma, aac, m4a Video formats divx, avi, asf 05 MP3 player Many MP3 players have a file indexing system that is not supported by the vehicle's audio system. In order to use an MP3 player, the system must be set to USB Removable device/ Mass Storage Device. 229 05 Infotainment Bluetooth media Streaming audio Introduction The vehicle's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can play streaming audio files from a Bluetooth device such as a cell phone or personal digital assistant (PDA). Navigation and control of the device can be done through the vehicle's center console control panel or the steering wheel keypad. On certain external devices, it is also possible to change tracks from the device. 05 In order to listen streaming audio, the vehicle's media player must first be put in Bluetooth mode. To do so, Press MEDIA several times until Bluetooth is displayed. Release the button and wait several seconds or press OK/ MENU. Choices can be made in the Bluetooth menus from the center console control panel or the steering wheel keypad. See page 256 for additional information about navigating the various menus. NOTE Overview Any Bluetooth media players used must support Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). The player must use AVRCP version 1.3 and A2DP 1.2. If older versions of these standards are used, certain features (e.g., scan or random) may not function. Not all cell phones or media players are fully compatible with the vehicle's Bluetooth system. A list of compatible devices is available at you Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us. The vehicle's media player can only play audio files through the Bluetooth function. Center console control panel VOL: Volume control MEDIA button TUNE: Turn to navigate among menu alternatives and folders shown in the display. OK/MENU: Press to confirm your selection or access the menus. EXIT: Press to go back in the menu structure or cancel a function. Left/right arrow keys: Short press: change tracks. Long press: fast forward/reverse within a track. The arrow keys on the steering wheel keypad can be used in the same way. MEDIA menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad. 230 05 Infotainment Bluetooth media See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system. Pairing and connecting an external device Before an external device can be connected, it must be paired to the infotainment system. The procedure for connecting an external device varies, depending whether or not the device has previously been paired to the infotainment system. A maximum of 10 external devices can be paired and each device only needs to be paired once. To pair a device: 1. Press MEDIA several times until Bluetooth is displayed, release the button and wait for several seconds or press OK/ MENU. 2. Press OK/MENU. > When Add device is displayed, press OK/MENU. 3. Be sure the external device's Bluetooth function is turned on and that the device is "discoverable." See the device's user's guide if necessary. 4. Press OK/MENU. > The infotainment system will search for external devices that are in range, which may take several minutes. The Bluetooth-names of the devices found will appear in the center console display. 5. Select the device to be paired and press OK/MENU. 6. Using the external device’s keypad, enter the digits shown in the audio system’s display and press the device's button used to confirm a choice. The external device will be automatically paired and connected to the infotainment system. Audio files can now be selected using the / buttons in the center console or on the steering wheel keypad. Automatic connection When the Bluetooth function is active and the most recently paired device is within range, it is automatically connected. When the infotainment system searches for the most recently paired device, its name is shown in the display. To connect another paired device, press EXIT. See the following section for information about switching to another device. Switching to another device It is possible to switch among paired Bluetooth devices that are in the vehicle. To do so: 1. Press MEDIA several times until Bluetooth is displayed, release the button and wait for several seconds or press OK/ MENU. 2. Be sure the external device's Bluetooth function is turned on and that the device is "discoverable." See the devices user's guide if necessary. 3. Press OK/MENU. 4. Turn TUNE to Change Bluetooth device and confirm by pressing OK/ MENU. > After a short time, the external device's name will appear in the display. If other devices that have been paired are in range, their names will also be displayed. 05 5. Select the device to be connected by turning TUNE and pressing OK/MENU to confirm. > The external device will be connected to the infotainment system. Audio files can now be selected using the / buttons in the center console or on the steering wheel keypad. Removing a paired device 1. In Bluetooth mode, press OK/MENU. `` 231 05 Infotainment Bluetooth media 2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth device and press OK/MENU. 3. Select the device to be removed by turning TUNE and confirm by pressing OK/ MENU. > A question asking if you would like to remove the device will be displayed. 4. Press OK/MENU to confirm or EXIT to cancel. Disconnecting an external device The external device is automatically disconnected from the audio system if it is moved out of range. 05 Random This function plays the audio files on the external device in random order (shuffle). This function can be activated/deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Random Press the / buttons on the center console or steering wheel keypad to change tracks. Scanning audio files on an external device This function plays the first ten seconds of each audio file. This function can be activated/ deactivated under: Bluetooth menu Scan. 232 Bluetooth version information This feature offers information about the Bluetooth version installed in the vehicle's infotainment system. This information can be found under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth software version in car. 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection Introduction cell phone can always be used regardless of whether or not the phone is connected to the hands-free system. TEL menu selections can be made from the center console or the steering wheel keypad. See page 256 for more information about the infotainment menu system. USA: FCC ID A269ZUA130 FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. IC RSS-Gen NOTE System overview Cell phone Location of the microphone Steering wheel keypad Center console control panel and display Bluetooth® hands-free This feature makes it possible to set up a wireless connection between a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and the vehicle’s infotainment system. This enables the infotainment system to function as a hands-free connection and allows you to remote-control a number of the phone’s functions. The microphone used by this system is located near the driver's side sun visor (2). The buttons and other controls on the Not all cell phones are fully compatible with the hands-free system. A list of compatible phones is available at your Volvo retailer or at www.volvocars.us WARNING Never use the hands-free feature or any other device in your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. Compliance This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 in. (20 cm) and more between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). 05 Canada: IC 700BIAM2101 FCC/IC common sentence This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. `` 233 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection Bluetooth® functions in the center console control panel Getting started Use the controls on the steering wheel keypad and in the center console to access, navigate and make selections in the hands-free system’s menus. Activating/deactivating A short press on the TEL button in the center console activates the hands-free system. The symbol in the display indicates that the hands-free system is active. 05 Character keys containing letters and numbers for dialing numbers, adding phone book entries, etc. TEL: Press this button to activate/deactivate the Bluetooth function. TUNE: Turn to navigate among the menu alternatives in the display. OK/MENU: Press to answer an incoming call, confirm your selection or access the phone menus. Incoming calls can also be answered by pressing the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad. EXIT: Press to end or reject calls, erase characters that have been entered, end an ongoing function. This function is also available on the steering wheel keypad. 234 A long press on the TEL button deactivates the hands-free system and disconnects the cell phone. Connecting cell phones The procedure for connecting a cell phone varies, depending on the phone itself and on whether or not the phone has been previously paired with the infotainment system (see page 231 for instructions on pairing an external device). There are two ways of pairing a cell phone to the hands-free system for the first time: Method 1: using the vehicle's menus 1. Activate the cell phone’s Bluetooth function to make the phone discoverable (refer to the phone’s owner’s manual if necessary) or go to www.volvocars.com 2. Activate the vehicle’s Bluetooth handsfree system by briefly pressing the TEL button. Continue by pressing OK/MENU. 3. Select Change phone and press OK/ MENU. > Add phone will be displayed. If other cell phones have already been paired with the infotainment system, their names will also be displayed. Press OK/ MENU. 4. With the cell phone in discoverable mode, press OK/MENU. > The infotainment system will search for cell phones that are in range, which takes approximately 30 seconds. Any phones detected will be displayed with their Bluetooth names. The hands-free system’s Bluetooth name will appear in the cell phone’s display as My Volvo Car. 5. Select one of the cell phones shown in the center console display. 6. Using the cell phone’s keypad, enter the digits shown in the center console display and press the button on the cell phone used to confirm a choice. 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection Method 2: using the cell phone’s menus Making a call 1. Activate the hands-free system by briefly pressing the TEL button in the center console. If there is a cell phone connected, disconnect it from the hands-free system. 1. Ensure that is shown at the top of the center console display and that the handsfree function is in telephone mode. 2. Make the vehicle discoverable via the Bluetooth function by pressing OK/ MENU and activating the menu selection Phone settings Discoverable. 3. Perform a search with the cell phone's Bluetooth function (see the cell phone's user's guide if necessary). 4. Select My Volvo Car in the list of devices shown in the cell phone’s display. 5. When prompted, enter a PIN code of your choice in the cell phone using the cell phone's keypad. Enter the same PIN code in the infotainment system using the system's keypad in the center console. 6. Connect to My Volvo Car from the cell phone. The cell phone will be paired (registered) and will be connected automatically to the infotainment system. For more information on pairing and connecting a cell phone, see page 237. 2. Dial the desired phone number using the center console keypad or use the speed dial function (see page 240). In normal view (see page 207 for information about the various display views). It is also possible to turn TUNE clockwise to access the phone book and then counter-clockwise for the call list. See page 237 for more information about the phone book. 3. Press OK/MENU End or reject a call by pressing EXIT. Disconnecting the cell phone The cell phone is automatically disconnected from the infotainment system if it is moved out of range. The cell phone can be manually disconnected from the hands-free system by pressing and holding TEL or in phone mode, going to Phone menu Disconnect phone. See also page 236 for more information about connections. The hands-free system is also deactivated when the ignition is switched off (or if the driver’s door is opened on vehicles equipped with the optional keyless drive). When the cell phone is disconnected from the hands-free system, a call in progress can be continued using the cell phone’s own speaker and microphone. Even if the cell phone has been disconnected manually, some phones may reconnect automatically to the most recently used hands-free unit, for example when a new call is initiated. Handling calls Incoming calls Press OK/MENU (or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad) to answer a call, even if the infotainment system is currently in another mode (e.g., RADIO or MEDIA). 05 Press EXIT to reject a call. Automatic answer This function means that incoming calls will be answered automatically. Activate or deactivate the function in the menu system under Phone menu Call options Auto answer. Call settings While a call is in progress, press OK/MENU or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to access the following functions: `` 235 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection • Mute: mute the infotainment system’s microphone. • Mobile phone: transfer the call from hands-free to the cell phone. On certain cell phones, the connection will be broken, which is normal. The hands-free function will ask if you would like to reconnect. • Dial number: dial a third party during an ongoing call using the number keys (the current call will be put on hold). 05 In normal view, a speed dial number for voice mail can be programmed and accessed by pressing and holding 1. The number for voice mail can be changed in phone mode in Phone menu Call options Voicemail number Change number. Sound settings Call lists Call volume Call lists are copied to the hands-free function each time a cell phone is connected and the lists are updated while the phone is connected. In normal view, turn TUNE counter-clockwise to see the All calls list. Call volume can be only be adjusted during a call. Use the buttons in the steering wheel keypad or the infotainment system’s VOL control. In phone mode, the various call lists can be displayed in Phone menu Call lists: • • • • All calls Missed calls Answered calls Dialed calls (certain cell phones show this list in reverse order) Infotainment system volume If no phone call is in progress, volume for the infotainment system can be adjusted in the normal way with the infotainment system's VOL control or from the steering wheel keypad. Infotainment system sound can be automatically muted when a phone call is received in Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio/media. • Call duration Ringing volume If no number has been stored, this menu can be accessed by pressing and holding 1. In phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring 1 236 Voice mail Not supported by all cell phones. volume and adjust the volume by turning VOL. Save the setting by pressing EXIT. Ringing tones The hands-free system’s integrated ringing tones can be selected in Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1, etc. NOTE The connected cell phone’s ring tone may not be switched off when one of the handsfree system's ringing tones is used. If you prefer to use the connected cell phone’s ring tone1, go to Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal. More information about pairing and connecting cell phones A maximum of 10 cell phones can be paired with the hands-free system. Pairing only needs to be done once for each phone. After pairing, the cell phone no longer needs to be in sight or discoverable. Only one cell phone can be actively connected to hands-free at a time. 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection Automatic connection Phone book When the hands-free system is active and the most recently connected cell phone is within range, it is connected automatically. If this phone is not within range, the hands-free system will attempt to connect one of the other paired cell phones. When the infotainment system searches for the most recently connected phone, this phone’s name appears in the display. The hands-free system uses two phone books (one with the cell phone's list of contacts and one with contacts saved directly in the infotainment system), which are combined to form one phone book. Manual connection To connect a phone other than the one that was most recently connected or to switch between cell phones that are already paired with the hands-free system, go to Phone menu Change phone. Removing a paired phone from the list In phone mode, a paired phone can be removed from the list of phones in Phone menu Remove Bluetooth device. NOTE Changes made from the infotainment system to a contact in the cell phone's phone book will result in a new contact being added to the infotainment system's phone book. However, this contact will not be saved in the cell phone's phone book. The infotainment system's display will show duplicate contacts with different icons. • The infotainment system downloads the phone book from a connected cell phone. This phone book will only be displayed when this cell phone is connected to the hands-free system. Please also note that if a speed dial number is saved or if a contact's information is edited, this will result in a new contact in the infotainment system's phone book. • The infotainment system also has an integrated phone book made up of contacts that have been saved in the system, regardless of which cell phone is currently connected when the contact is saved. These contacts will be displayed regardless of the cell phone that is connected. If a contact has been saved in the infotainsymbol will be disment system, the played next to it. The symbol must be displayed before the phone book can be used and the handsfree function must be in phone mode. The infotainment system saves a copy of each paired cell phone's phone book. This phone book can be copied each time the phone is connected. Bluetooth version Bluetooth For information about the version installed in the vehicle, go to Phone menu Phone settings Bluetooth software version in car. 05 Activate/deactivate this function in phone mode in Phone menu Phone settings Download phone book. If the phone book contains information about someone who is trying to call you, this information will be shown in the display. `` 237 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection Contact shortcuts A quick way of searching the phone book for contacts in normal view is to turn TUNE clockwise to access the phone book and then counter-clockwise to select a contact from the list. Press OK/MENU to call. Each name in the phone book has a default symbol is displayed to phone number. If the the right of it, this indicates that there are additional phone numbers for this contact. To use a phone number other than the default one, press the button on the center console control panel. Turn TUNE to select a different phone number and press OK/MENU to call. 05 It is also possible to search for a contact by using the center console keypad to enter the first letter(s) of the contact's name (see also the following table "Buttons in the center console" for each button's function). The list of contacts can also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the center console keypad with the first letter of the contact's name. For example, pressing and holding button 6 would provide direct access to the section of the list with contacts whose names begin with M. Buttons in the center console Button Function Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1 ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2 DEFÈÉ3 GHIÌ4 JKL5 MNOÖØÑÒ6 PQRSß7 Searching for contacts using the text wheel List of characters Switch between character entry modes (see the following table) Phone book (list of contacts) TUVÜÙ8 WXYZ9 Shift between upper and lower case +0pw #* 238 Searching for contacts To search for or edit a contact in phone mode, go to Phone menu Phone book Search. 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter keys on the center console can also be used. 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results of the search will be displayed in the phone book (3). 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection 3. To switch from letter entry mode to the entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn TUNE to one of the selections (see the explanation in the following table) in the list for switching character entry mode (2) and press OK/MENU. Adding a new contact 4. To switch from letter entry mode to the entry mode for numbers or special characters, or to toggle between upper and lower case letters, etc., turn TUNE to one of the selections (see the explanation in the following table) in the list (1) and press OK/ MENU. Character entry modes 123/ ABC Toggle between letters and numbers by pressing OK/MENU. More Switch to special characters by pressing OK/MENU. This leads to the phone book (3). Turn TUNE to select a contact and press OK/MENU to display the contact's information. Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. Press and hold EXIT to erase all of the characters that have been entered. If a number button on the center console is pressed while the text wheel is displayed, a list of characters (1) will be displayed. Briefly press the button once to enter its first letter, twice to enter the second letter, etc. Continue to press the button to display other characters. Continue with the next character, etc. To enter a number, press and hold the button. 3. Continue to the next letter, etc. The name entered will be displayed in the character entry field (2). Enter the name of a new contact Switch between character entry modes (see the following table) Character entry field New contacts can be added in phone mode in Phone menu Phone book New contact. 1. When Name is highlighted, press OK/ MENU to go to the character entry mode (see the illustration). 2. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter keys on the center console can also be used. When you have finished entering the name, select OK in the list in the display (1) and press OK/MENU. Continue by entering the phone number in the same way. When you have entered the phone number, press OK/MENU and select a tag for the number (Mobile phone, Home, Work or General). Press OK/MENU to confirm. 05 When all of the contact's information has been entered, select Save contact in the menu to save. 123/ ABC Toggle between letters and numbers by pressing OK/MENU. More Switch to special characters by pressing OK/MENU. OK Save and return to Add contact by pressing OK/MENU. `` 239 05 Infotainment Bluetooth® hands-free connection Toggle between upper and lower case letters by pressing OK/ MENU. is activated in Phone menu Receive vCard. Phone book Memory status Press OK/MENU and the cursor will move to the character entry field (2) at the top of the display. The cursor can now be moved by turning TUNE to a position where new characters can be entered or deleted by pressing EXIT. In order to add characters, return to text entry mode by pressing OK/ MENU. 05 Speed dial Speed dial numbers can be added in phone mode in Phone menu Phone book Speed dial. To use speed dial to make a call in phone mode, press a button on the center console keypad followed by OK/MENU. If a contact has not been saved on the speed dial number used, you will be prompted to save a contact on the number selected. Accept vCards vCards from other cell phones can be added to the infotainment system's phone book. To enable this feature, put the infotainment system in discoverable mode for Bluetooth. The feature 240 In phone mode, the memory status of the infotainment system's phone book and the connected cell phone's phone book can be seen in Phone menu Phone book Memory status. Clearing the phone book In phone mode, all entries in the infotainment system's phone book can be cleared in Phone menu Phone book Clear phone book. NOTE Clearing the entries in the infotainment system's phone book does not delete entries in the cell phone's phone book. 05 Infotainment Cell phone voice control Introduction The infotainment system's voice control feature1 enables the driver to voice-activate certain functions in a Bluetooth-connected cell phone or the navigation system. NOTE • • The information in this section applies to using voice commands to operate a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. See also the section "Bluetooth hands-free connection" beginning on page 233 for detailed information about using a cell phone with the vehicle's infotainment system. The navigation system has a separate user's guide containing information about voice commands for operating that system. WARNING As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle safely and adhering to all applicable traffic regulations. The voice control feature provides access to a number of functions in the Bluetooth handsfree and navigation systems while allowing you to keep your hands on the steering wheel. Input is in dialogue form using spoken commands from the user and verbal prompts from the system. Voice control uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth hands-free system (see the illustration on page 233) and system prompts are provided through the infotainment system's front speakers. Voice commands offer convenience and help avoid distractions so that you can concentrate on driving and focus your attention on road and traffic conditions. 1 Getting started Voice control button on the steering wheel Activating the system 05 Before any phone voice commands can be used, a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired with the infotainment system. If a phone command is given, the system will inform you If there is no cell phone paired. See page 234 for information on pairing a cell phone. Press the voice control button (1 in the illustration) to activate the system and initiate a command dialogue. The system will display commonly used commands on the screen when the button has been pressed. Available in vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo Navigation System only `` 241 05 Infotainment Cell phone voice control While using the voice control system, keep the following points in mind: • When giving commands, speak at your usual speed and in a normal tone of voice after the tone • The vehicle's doors, windows and moonroof should be closed when using the voice control system • Avoid background noises in the cabin when using the system NOTE 05 If you are uncertain of the commands that you can use, saying "help" will prompt the system to provide a number of commands that can be used in a specific situation. Voice control commands can be cancelled by: 242 Voice control support features • Tutorial: A feature that helps acquaint you with the system and the procedure for giving commands. • Training: A feature that enables the voice control system to become familiar with your voice and pronunciation, and allows you to set up user profiles. Two user profiles can be voice trained. These support features are accessed by pressing the MY CAR button in the center console and turning TUNE to scroll to the desired menu selection. Tutorial The tutorial feature can be started in two ways: NOTE The tutorial feature can only be started when the vehicle is parked and the parking brake is applied. • • • Saying "cancel" Pressing and holding the voice control button • By pressing the voice control button and • Pressing EXIT or one of the mode buttons (RADIO, MEDIA, etc.). • By pressing MY CAR and going to Not speaking saying "Voice tutorial." Settings Voice settings Voice tutorial. Press OK/MENU to begin the tutorial lesson. The tutorial is divided into three lessons, which take a total of approximately 5 minutes to complete. By default, the system will begin with the first lesson. To skip to the next lesson, press the voice control button and say "next." Go back to a previous lesson by saying "previous." Press and hold the voice control button to exit the tutorial. Training The system will display up to fifteen phrases for you to say. To start the voice training procedure, press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice settings Voice training. Select User 1 or User 2 and press OK/MENU to begin. After the training has been completed, remember to set your user profile in Voice user setting. Other voice control settings found in MY CAR • Voice user setting: Two user profiles can be set by pressing MY CAR and going to Settings Voice settings Voice user setting. Select User 1 or User 2. • Voice output volume: Press MY CAR and go to Settings Voice settings Voice output volume. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE to raise or lower the volume. Press EXIT to save the change and exit the menu. 05 Infotainment Cell phone voice control Using voice commands The driver initiates a voice command dialogue by pressing the voice control button (see the illustration on page 241). "Delete" (which will erase the entire phone number). General commands. See page 133 for more information on the menu system. Dialing a number Dialing from a call list When a dialogue has been initiated, commonly used commands will be shown in the display. Grayed-out texts or texts in parentheses are not part of the spoken command. The system understands the digits zero to nine. These numbers can be spoken individually, in groups of several digits at a time, or the entire number can be given at once. Numbers above nine will not be recognized. The dialogue below enables you make a call from one of your cell phone's call lists. Once you become familiar with the system, you can speed up the command dialogue by briefly pressing the voice control button to skip prompts from the system. The following is an example of a voice command dialogue. The system's response may vary depending on the situation. Commands can be given in several ways. For example, the command "Phone call contact" can be spoken as: Phone > dial number • "Phone > Call contact"—say "Phone," wait Phone dial number for a system response, and then continue by saying "Call contact." • "Phone call contact"—give the entire command at one time The following is a list of features that can be voice-controlled with a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. Shortcuts Shortcut commands for using the phone can be found in the MY CAR menu system, under Settings Voice settings Voice command list Phone commands and The user initiates the dialogue by saying: or System response Number please User action Begin saying the digits in the phone number. If you say several digits and pause, the system will repeat them and prompt you by saying "Continue." Continue saying the digits. When you have finished, complete the command by saying "Dial." • You can also change the number by using the commands "Correction" (which deletes the last group of digits spoken) or The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone > dial from call list or Phone dial from call list Continue by responding to the system's prompts. Calling a contact The dialogue below enables you to call the predefined contacts in your cell phone. See the phone's user's guide if necessary. 05 The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone > call contact or Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system's prompts. When calling contacts, keep the following in mind: • If there are several contacts with similar names, they will be presented in the dis`` 243 05 Infotainment Cell phone voice control play in numbered lines and the system will prompt you to pick a line number • If there are more lines in the list than can be displayed at one time, saying "Down" will enable you to scroll downward in the list (and saying "up" will take you back up through the list). Dialing voicemail The dialogue below enables you to call your voicemail to check any messages that you may have received. Your voicemail phone number must be registered in the Bluetooth function, see page 236. 05 The user initiates the dialogue by saying: Phone > dial voicemail or Phone dial voicemail Continue by responding to the system's prompts. 244 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* Overview 05 Screen: channel A (left), channel B (right) Introduction Headphone socket The RSE system provides entertainment for the rear seat passengers by making it possible to e.g., watch a film, play music, listen to the radio or connect an external device such as a game console. On/Off button A/V-AUX socket Remote control Headphones IR transceiver RSE is fully integrated into the vehicle's infotainment system and can be used at the same time as other infotainment features. For example, if a rear seat passenger is using A/V-AUX and headphones, the driver and front seat passenger can still use the vehicle's radio or media player. However, only one disc can be played in the media player at a time. You can listen to music from e.g., an iPod or from streaming audio files using the Bluetooth function. The RSE system can be controlled from the front screen (parental control). Different media can be played or viewed from different sources on the various screens (front center console and/or the respective screens in the rear seat). It is also possible to play or view media from the same source on one or more of the screens. However, it is not possible to play a film from USB while a CD or DVD is being played. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* CAUTION When transporting large objects in the rear seat, be sure that there is adequate space between the object(s) and the RSE screens to help avoid scratching or damaging these screens. If necessary, cover the screens with a suitable material. NOTE • 05 • The RSE screens and remote control may not function in very low or very high cabin temperatures. They will become operable again after the climate control system has created a comfortable temperature in the cabin. Keep the IR transceivers' lenses clean by wiping them regularly with a damp cloth. A dirty lens could affect the function of the remote control. Ignition modes and electrical current to RSE RSE can be activated with the ignition in modes I or II (and when the engine is running). See page 82 for detailed information about the various ignition modes. If a film is being played, it will stop momentarily while the engine is 246 being started and will resume when the engine is running. Cordless headphones NOTE Using RSE for more than approx. 10 minutes when the engine is not running will drain the vehicle's battery and may make the engine difficult or impossible to start. A message will be displayed on the screen if the battery's charge level becomes too low. Using the system's menus Selections in the RSE menus are made using the remote control. See page 251 for more information about the RSE menus. Switch for selecting channel A (CH.A) or channel B (CH.B) On/Off button Volume Remote control A remote control is included with the RSE system, which can be used to control both screens in the rear seat as well as other infotainment system functions. See page 254 for more detailed information about the remote control. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. On/Off indicator light Two sets of cordless headphones are included with the RSE system. The cordless headphones are activated using the On/Off button (2). The indicator light (4) will illuminate when the headphones are on. Select CH.A (channel A) or CH.B (channel B) with switch (1). Use control (3) to adjust the volume. 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* NOTE The headphones will switch off automatically after approx. 3 minutes if they are not used. Disposing of old batteries Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Connecting a device to the A/V-AUX socket Headphone socket Replacing batteries in the headphones The headphones use two AAA batteries. It is advisable to have extra batteries on hand during long trips. External headphones can be connected to the 3.5 mm headphone socket on the side of the head restraint (see the illustration on page 245 for the location of this socket). Adjust the volume with the remote control. A/V-AUX socket, 12-volt socket This A/V-AUX socket is used to connect external devices to the RSE system. When connecting an external device, always follow the instructions provided with the device. Devices connected through the A/V-AUX socket can use the screens, cordless headphones, the 3.5 mm headphone socket and the infotainment system's speakers. Battery cover and retaining screw 1. Unscrew the retaining screw and remove the battery cover. 2. Remove the old batteries and insert new ones in the directions indicated by the symbols in the battery holder. CAUTION Please be aware that external devices connected through the A/V-AUX socket may cause interference in the RSE system. The A/V-AUX socket is located under the center armrest in the tunnel console 05 1. Connect the device's video cable to the yellow connector. 2. Connect the left audio cable to the white connector and the right audio cable to the red one. 3. If the device is designed to use 12-volt current, connect its power cable to the 12-volt socket (see page 200 for the location of this socket). Always follow the device's instructions when connecting it to the RSE system. 3. Put the cover back in place and tighten the retaining screw. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* Audio/video playback through the A/VAUX socket 1. Switch on one of the rear screens by pressing its On/Off button. 2. Use the remote control's button to select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the remote control toward the selected screen's IR transceiver and press the button several times to come to A/V AUX . Release the button and wait several seconds to confirm your choice. 05 tinue by pressing the or button on the remote control to select a source such as Disc, etc. Settings made from the front center control panel 1. Press MEDIA several times to come to RSE on the front screen. Wait several seconds for your selection to be confirmed. 2. Turn TUNE to select one or both of the rear screens and confirm by pressing OK/ MENU. 3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to confirm. 4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (for example, Disc) and confirm by pressing OK/MENU. The selected source will begin playing automatically (if there is a disc in the media player). 3. Switch on the connected device and press PLAY (or the device's equivalent button). Input volume Cancel and return by pressing EXIT. Adjust the input volume in the RSE menu, under A/V AUX input volume. Activating RSE TUNE Settings can also be made with the remote control. See page 254 for more detailed information. The RSE system can be activated using controls on the front or rear screens. OK/MENU Muting MEDIA From the front seat, press MEDIA (see the following illustration) and select RSE. From the rear seat, press the screen's On/Off button button. Use the remote control's to select a screen (L: left rear screen or R: right rear screen). Point the remote control toward the selected screen's IR transceiver and con- 248 both rear screens or different sources can be selected for the respective screens. EXIT Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel An audio/video source for the rear screen(s) can be selected from the front center control panel. The same source can be selected for * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Audio for the rear screens can be muted from the front center control panel. This function can be activated under RSE settings Mute as explained in points 2-4 in the section "Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel." 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* Switching off the rear screens Rear screen settings1 Both of rear screens can be switched off from the front center control panel. This function can be activated under RSE settings Display off as explained in points 2-4 in the section "Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel" on page 248. When watching a video file, a pop-up menu can on the remote be displayed by pressing control. The content of this menu will vary, depending on the what is being played/viewed. Press one of the remote control's number keys (0 - 9) to switch the screens on again. The screens will also be switched on when the ignition is switched on. Disabling the remote control (front) The IR transceiver for the front screen can be switched off, which means that the remote control cannot be used on the front screen. This function can be activated under RSE settings Disable remote control (front) as explained in points 2-4 in the section "Selecting a source for the rear screens from the front center control panel" on page 248. Day/Night mode The screens can be set for three different lighting conditions: Auto, Day or Night. Press on the remote control and change the setting under Day/Night mode on the screen. See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus. Image settings Screen settings can be made for brightness, contrast, tint and color. on the remote control and change Press the setting under Image settings on the screen. See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus. Screen aspect ratio Zoom 1: Full-screen image, but parts of the image will not be viewable. Zoom 2: Full-screen image, but the aspect ratio will be slightly distorted. Unless otherwise indicated, the aspect ratio will be Normal. Press on the remote control and change the setting under Aspect ratio on the screen. See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus. Source menu The content of each source's pop-up menu will vary, depending on what is being played/ viewed, for example: Disc menu or USB menu. See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus. 05 DVD menu2 If a DVD video is being viewed, this selection will appear in the pop-up menu. See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus. Three screen aspect ratios can be set: Normal, Zoom 1 and Zoom 2. Normal: The image on the screen is presented at the normal aspect ratio (usually 4:3 or 16:9). 1 2 Applies only when watching video files. Applies only to video DVDs. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* Rear screen menu settings Music, video and radio See also page 251 for additional information about the RSE menus. Listening to music Random3 See page 224 for additional information. Repeat folder4 See page 225 for additional information. DivX Video On Demand 05 The media player can be registered to play DivX VOD files from home-burned discs or USB. The registration code can be found by pressing the MY CAR button, and going to Settings Information DivX® VOD code. Go to www.divx.com/vod for additional information. USB hub A USB hub can be connected to the USB socket (see page 229 for additional information). 3 4 250 Music from disc tracks/audio files can be played through the media player's USB/AUX sockets or from streaming audio files coming from a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. For more information about the media player, see page 225, see page 227 for information about the AUX/USB sockets and see page 230 for information about Bluetooth media. 1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the right screen. Playback and navigating in playlists Navigate using the remote control's scroll wheel (see the illustration on page 254) to select the desired playlist or folder structure. to confirm the choice of a sub-folder Use or to begin playing the selected track/audio file. Tracks/audio files can also be played by pressing on the remote control and change tracks/audio files by pressing / . Stop playback by pressing . See page 225 for more information about the media player. Watching a video 2. Use the remote control's button to select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the remote control toward a screen's IR transone or more times ceiver and press to come to the desired source (Disc, USB, AUX, etc.), release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted. Video tracks/files can be viewed via the vehicle's media player or the USB socket. 3. Insert a CD in the infotainment system's media player, or connect an external device to the vehicle's USB/AUX sockets or via Bluetooth. 2. Use the remote control's button to select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen). Point the remote control toward a screen's IR transone or more times ceiver and press Applies to CD audio, CDs/DVDs, USB and iPod. Applies to audio/video files on home-burned discs/USB only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. For more information about the media player, see page 225 or page 227 for information about the USB socket. 1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the right screen. 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* to select the desired source (Disc or USB), release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted. 3. Insert a DVD in the infotainment system's media player, or connect an external device to the vehicle's USB socket. Playback and navigation Play a video track/video file by pressing on the remote control and change tracks/video files by pressing / . Stop playback by pressing . See page 224 for more information about playback and navigation on video DVDs and page 225 for information about playing video files. Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the / buttons to fast forward/reverse. Fast forward/reverse can be done at several speeds for video files by briefly pressing these buttons to increase the speed. Fast forward/reverse is done at one speed for audio files. Stop fast forward/reverse by press, or the / buttons. ing Listening to the radio You can also listen to the infotainment system's radio through the RSE system. 1. Switch on the cordless headphones, select CH.A for the left screen or CH.B for the right screen. 2. Point the remote control toward a screen's IR transceiver and press one or more times to come to the desired source (AM, FM1, Sirius1*, etc.), release the button and wait several seconds for your selection to be accepted. 3. Select a station using one of the preset buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or / to search for the next/ press previous available station. See page 214 for more information about the radio. RSE front screen menus To access this menu, begin by selecting RSE under MEDIA by pressing this button on the front center console (or by using the remote control or the steering wheel keypad). Continue by pressing OK/MENU to access the menu. Turn TUNE to the desired selection and confirm by pressing OK/MENU. Settings can be made for the left or right rear screen separately or for both screens (Left RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen menu and Both RSE screen menus): Power off/Power on 05 RADIO MEDIA RSE menus RSE settings Introduction Settings in the RSE menus can be made from the front center console control panel or by using the remote control in the rear seat. A source for one of the rear screens can be activated from the front center control panel and certain settings for the rear screens can also be made from this panel. Mute Display off Disable remote control (front) Reset all RSE settings `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* RSE pop-up menu5 Press on the remote control while a video file is playing to display the pop-up menu. Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote to make menu selections. See page 254 for detailed information about the remote control. Screen aspect ration The menus for AM, FM1, FM2, Sirius1* and Sirius2* are: Day/Night mode Source menu6 DVD disc menu Subtitles Audio tracks Advanced settings RSE CD Audio menu Disc menu Reset all DVD settings Day/Night mode Display off RSE rear screen menus Reset all CD settings RSE CD/DVD Data menu Disc menu Use the scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote to make menu selections. See page 254 for detailed information about the remote control. RADIO 252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. USB menu Random Repeat folder Select USB device Repeat folder DivX® VOD code Display off Applies only when a video file is playing. The content of the menu will vary according to what is being played, for example Disc Applies to DVD videos only RSE USB menu DivX® VOD code Random Day/Night mode 7 Day/Night mode Display off Random 05 5 6 Disc menu Reset all RSE settings MEDIA DVD disc menu7 Press on the remote control when a source (e.g., Disc) has been selected to access the RSE-menus for the rear screens. RSE DVD Video menu Display off Image settings Day/Night mode Reset all CD/DVD settings menu or USB menu. Day/Night mode Display off Reset all USB settings 05 Infotainment Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)* RSE AUX menu Display off AUX menu Reset all Bluetooth settings AUX input volume Day/Night mode Display off Reset all AUX settings RSE A/V-AUX menu A/V AUX menu A/V AUX input volume Day/Night mode Display off 05 Reset all A/V-AUX settings RSE iPod menu iPod menu Random Day/Night mode Display off Reset all iPod settings RSE Bluetooth menu Bluetooth menu Random Day/Night mode * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 05 Infotainment Remote control* Remote control1 NOTE The remote control included with the Rear Seat Entertainment system (RSE)* can be used to control all of the infotainment system's functions. Avoid exposing the remote control to strong sunlight, for instance by leaving it on the dashboard. This could cause problems with its batteries. To use the remote, begin by pressing its button to select a screen (L: left rear screen, F: front screen, or R: right rear screen). Continue by pointing the remote toward the selected rear screen's IR transceiver (see the illustration on page 245) or to the front screen's IR transceiver located to the right of the INFO button on the center console (see page 211 for the location of this button). 05 Button Select a screen (L: left rear), (F: front) or (R: right rear) Switch to the optional Volvo Navigation system Select one of the infotainment system's radio wavebands (AM, FM1, etc.) To control one of the rear RSE screens, select butL (left)/R (right) using the remote's ton. Continue by pointing the remote at the selected screen's IR transceiver (see the illustration on page 245 for its location). Select one of the infotainment system's sources (Disc, USB, etc.) Select the Bluetooth hands-free feature WARNING To help avoid the risk of injuries in the event of sudden braking or a collision, always stow loose objects such as the remote control, cell phones, cameras, etc. in the glove compartment or other storage compartments when not in use. 1 254 Vehicles with the optional Rear Seat Entertainment system only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Function Fast reverse, change tracks/ songs Play/pause The scroll wheel has the same function as TUNE in the center console control panel. 05 Infotainment Remote control* Button Function Stop Fast forward, change tracks/ songs DVD menu Go back one step in a menu, cancel a function or delete entered characters Navigate up/down Navigate right/left Button It is advisable to have extra batteries on long trips. Function One-button access to frequently used functions (which must be programmed into the button, see page 211) Information about the current film, song, etc., or to display information not currently shown on the screen Select language for audio tracks Subtitles, select subtitle language 1. Press down on the battery cover and slide it in the direction indicated in the illustration. Not in use Confirm a selection or go to the current source's main menu Reduce volume Increase volume 0-9 Use to select preset channels or enter characters Replacing batteries The remote control runs on four AA/LR6 batteries. 05 2. Remove the old batteries and insert new ones in the directions indicated by the symbols in the battery holder. 3. Slide the cover back into place. Worn out batteries should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. NOTE The batteries' normal service life ranges from 1-4 years, depending on how often the remote is used. If the remote is not working properly, try replacing the four AA/LR6 batteries. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 05 Infotainment Infotainment system menus Navigating in the menus TEL RADIO menus Infotainment settings are made via the system's menus. Press one of the mode buttons (RADIO, MEDIA, or TEL—see the illustration on page 206) to select it and access its specific menus. When a mode has been selected, press OK/MENU to access its menus. TUNE Main AM menu Menu selections can be made using the controls in the center console and certain functions can also be controlled from the steering wheel keypad. Each mode is described in its respective section. Controls in the center console 05 RADIO OK/MENU Show presets Search paths Throughout this manual, search paths to the menu system functions are listed as shown in the following example: Audio settings Equalizer, if the following steps have been taken first: 1. Press the desired mode button, (RADIO, MEDIA, etc). Continue pressing the button to navigate through the various selections displayed (e.g., FM1). Release the button and wait several seconds to automatically accept the selection or turn TUNE and press OK/MENU. 256 Scan Audio settings1 Sound stage Equalizer Volume compensation Reset all audio settings Main FM1/FM2 menu FM menu Show radio text 2. Turn TUNE or use the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to scroll to the desired menu selection, such as Audio settings, and press OK/MENU to confirm a selection. Show presets 3. Turn TUNE again to scroll to the desired submenu (e.g., Equalizer) where applicable and press OK/MENU. Audio settings1 MEDIA 1 AM menu The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes Scan Advanced settings Reset all FM settings 05 Infotainment Infotainment system menus Sirius1 SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button to activate SIRIUS. Channel lock list Scan Unlock all channels Audio settings1 Temporarily unlock all channels Sirius2 SIRIUS radio off. Press RADIO button to activate SIRIUS. Change code Audio settings1 Song memory Main DVD Video menu Disc menu DVD disc menu Play/Pause/Continue Add song Song Seek Delete song View song memory MEDIA menus Stop Subtitles Main CD Audio menu Disc menu Random Channel list information Audio tracks Advanced settings DivX® VOD code Audio settings1 Artist 05 Angle Scan Station name Audio settings1 Title Main CD/DVD Data menu Information Disc menu Show presets Play/Pause Category list Stop Advanced SIRIUS settings Random Skip options Channel skip list 1 Change audio track Lock options Main Sirius1*/Sirius2* menu Repeat folder Main iPod menu iPod menu Random Scan Audio settings1 Change subtitles The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257 05 Infotainment Infotainment system menus Main USB menu Main AUX menu Change phone USB menu AUX menu Remove Bluetooth device Play/Pause AUX input volume Stop Audio settings1 Random Sounds and volume TEL menus Download phone book Select USB device Main Bluetooth hands-free menu Change subtitles Phone menu Bluetooth software version in car Call lists Scan All calls Audio settings1 Missed calls 05 Answered calls Main Bluetooth media menu Bluetooth menu Random Change device Remove Bluetooth device Scan Bluetooth software version in car Audio settings1 Dialed calls Call duration Phone book Search New contact Speed dials Receive vCard Memory status Clear phone book 258 Discoverable Repeat folder Change audio track 1 Phone settings The audio settings are the same for all infotainment system modes Call options Auto answer Voicemail number Disconnect phone 05 Infotainment 05 259 Driving recommendations..................................................................... Refueling............................................................................................... Loading................................................................................................. Cargo area ........................................................................................... Towing a trailer...................................................................................... Emergency towing................................................................................ 260 262 266 271 275 278 281 DURING YOUR TRIP 06 During your trip Driving recommendations General information Economical driving conserves natural resources Better driving economy may be obtained by thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to immediate traffic conditions. Observe the following rules: • Do not exceed posted speed limits. • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load) in the vehicle. • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire pressure regularly (when tires are cold). • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or ice has ended. • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, increase air resistance and also fuel consumption. • Bring the engine to normal operating temperature as soon as possible by driving with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for the first few minutes of operation. A cold engine uses more fuel and is subject to increased wear. • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle for driving short distances. This does not allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature. 06 • Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration and hard braking. • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position as often as possible and avoid using kickdown. • Using the transmission's Sport mode1 may increase fuel consumption somewhat. Use the transmission's Drive (D) position as often as possible. See page 117 for additional information about Sport mode. 1 262 Models with the T6 turbo engine only. • At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption will be lower with the air conditioning on and the windows closed than with the air conditioning off and the windows open. • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel consumption modes can help you learn how to drive more economically. Other factors that decrease gas mileage are: • • • • Dirty air cleaner Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter Dragging brakes Incorrect front end alignment Some of the above mentioned items and others are checked at the standard maintenance intervals. WARNING Driving with the tailgate open: Driving with the tailgate open could lead to poisonous exhaust gases entering the passenger compartment. If the tailgate must be kept open for any reason, proceed as follows: • • Close the windows Set the ventilation system control to air flow to floor, windshield and side windows and the blower control to its highest setting. Weight distribution affects handling At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer, which means that the steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures good stability and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these properties can alter with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in the cargo area, the less the tendency to understeer. Handling, roadholding Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle load. See the "Tire pressure" section. Loads should be dis- 06 During your trip Driving recommendations tributed so that capacity weight or maximum permissible axle loads are not exceeded. CAUTION • Engine damage will occur if water is drawn into the air cleaner. • If the vehicle is driven through water deeper than 10 in (25 cm), water may enter the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and may shorten the service life of these components. Driving through water • The vehicle can be driven through water up to a depth of approximately 10 in. (25 cm), at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). • Take particular care when driving through flowing water. • Clean the electrical connections for trailer wiring after driving in mud or water. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. • If the engine has been stopped while the vehicle is in water, do not attempt to restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of the water. • When driving through water, maintain low speed and do not stop in the water. WARNING After driving through water, press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are functioning normally. Water or mud can make the brake linings slippery, resulting in delayed braking effect. Engine and cooling system Under special conditions, for example when driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and cooling system will overheat. Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the engine. • Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep hills. • Do not turn the engine off immediately when stopping after a hard drive. WARNING The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. • Remove any auxiliary lights from in front of the grille when driving in hot weather conditions. • Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly terrain. The oil temperature could become too high. Conserving electrical current Keep the following in mind to help minimize battery drain: • When the engine is not running, avoid using ignition mode II. Many electrical systems (the audio system, the optional navigation system, power windows, etc) will function in ignition modes 0 and I. These modes reduce drain on the battery. 06 • Please keep in mind that using systems, accessories, etc., that consume a great deal of current when the engine is not running could result in the battery being completely drained. Driving or having the engine running for approximately 15 minutes will help keep the battery charged. • The optional 12 volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even with `` 263 06 During your trip Driving recommendations the ignition switched off, which drains the battery. Before a long distance trip It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances. Your retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event that problems occur. • Consider your destination. If you will be driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur, consider snow tires. Cold weather precautions As a minimum, the following items should be checked before any long trip: • Check that engine runs smoothly and that • Make sure that the engine coolant contains • • • • • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. Have the transmission oil level checked. Check condition of drive belts. Check state of the battery's charge. Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as well), and replace those that are worn. Check tire pressures. • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steering gear should be checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. • Check all lights, including high beams. • Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states/provinces. 264 Volvo service technician if you intend to drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel. If you wish to check your vehicle before the approach of cold weather, the following advice is worth noting: fuel consumption is normal. 06 • Have a word with a trained and qualified 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will reduce freeze protection. This gives protection against freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must not be mixed. • Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to add fuel line de-icer before refueling. • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. For winter use, 5W-30 oil, particularly the synthetic type, is recom- mended. Be sure to use good quality oil but do not use cold-weather oil for hard driving or in warm weather, see page 356 for more information on engine oil. NOTE Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. • The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc. are used more often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on all four wheels for winter driving, see page 298. • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often splashed on the windshield during winter driving, requiring the frequent use of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 06 During your trip Driving recommendations 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water. • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can cause damage to the locks. 06 265 06 During your trip Refueling Fuel requirements Deposit control gasoline (detergent additives) Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure whether the gasoline contains deposit control additives, check with the service station operator. NOTE Volvo does not recommend the use of external fuel injector cleaning systems. 06 266 Unleaded fuel Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labelled "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline damages the three-way catalytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effective- ness of the emission control system and could result in loss of emission warranty coverage. State and local vehicle inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles. sonal air quality standards, some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed on page 267 must still be met. Alcohol – Ethanol NOTE Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please return your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for service. Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, "Oxygenated fuels" Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check with the service station operator. To meet sea- Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% MTBE may be used. Methanol Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 06 During your trip Refueling Octane rating change gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation. Minimum octane NOTE When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable. G028920 Fuel Formulations Typical pump octane label Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will not affect engine reliability. Volvo engines are designed to achieve rated horsepower, torque, and fuel economy performance using premium 91 octane fuel. Demanding driving In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to 1 Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include: • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle while refueling • refueling only at gas stations with vapor Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some of these additives contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals. WARNING Never carry a cell phone that is switched on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings, this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and injury. WARNING Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger compartment is ventilated, and immediately return the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for correction. 06 recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of the filler neck during refueling • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a fuel filler nozzle. AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. `` 267 06 During your trip Refueling tral locking button does not lock the fuel filler door. Opening/closing the fuel filler door Manually opening the fuel filler door • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstructed and is completely closed after refueling. • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot weather. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed. CAUTION • The fuel filler door is located on the right rear fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel ) tank symbol on the information display 06 With the ignition switched off, press and release the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked. • You can also keep the vehicle locked if you remain inside it during refueling. The cen- 268 Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause damage to painted surfaces, which may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If necessary, the fuel filler door can be opened manually: 1. Open the side hatch in the cargo compartment (on the same side as the fuel filler door). 2. Grasp the green cord with a handle. 3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until the fuel filler door clicks open. 06 During your trip Refueling Opening/closing the fuel cap CAUTION • • Do not refuel with the engine running2. Turn the ignition off or to position I. If the ignition is on, an incorrect reading could occur in the fuel gauge. Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not press the handle on the filler nozzle more than one extra time. Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems. • Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather conditions. • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the filler cap slowly. Emission controls After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place. Three-way catalytic converter • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain engine malfunctions, particularly involving the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems, may cause unusually high threeway catalytic converter temperatures. Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help 2 avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system components or location or removing components, and/or repeated use of leaded fuel. 06 NOTE Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters. If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps. `` 269 06 During your trip Refueling Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions. 06 270 06 During your trip Loading To increase loading space, the rear seat backrests can be folded down, see page 87. When loading the cargo area, keep the following in mind: • Load objects in the cargo area against the backrest whenever possible. • Unstable loads can be secured to the load anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting. • Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in motion. Power tailgate* WARNING • Stop the engine, put the gear selector in P, and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. • The vehicle's driving characteristics may change depending on the weight and distribution of the load. • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). • The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. G031965 Introduction The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is determined by factors such as the number of passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of any accessories that may be installed, etc. Power tailgate closing button Automatic opening The power tailgate can be opened automatically in the three ways: • By pressing and holding the button on the lighting panel until the tailgate begins to open. 06 • By pressing and holding the button on the remote key until the tailgate begins to open. • By pressing the rubber-covered button under the outer handle on the tailgate. The taillights illuminate automatically when the automatic open function is used. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 06 During your trip Loading CAUTION Be sure that there is adequate space above and behind the vehicle before opening the tailgate automatically. The vehicle should not be driven or moved with the tailgate in the open position. However, if the vehicle is moved with the tailgate in the open position, the automatic closing function will be inoperative until one of the following occurs: • • Automatic closing The power tailgate can be closed by pressing the button on the tailgate (see the illustration) or by pressing it down. NOTE If the tailgate is pressed down e.g., by the weight of snow or strong wind, it will close automatically. The tailgate is closed manually The ignition is switched off and the key is removed for approximately 10 minutes (the tailgate will function again after restart). 06 If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or disconnected, the tailgate must be opened and closed once manually to reset the system. If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being operated, the pinch protection function is activated. • If the tailgate is being opened, the electrical function will be switched off and the tailgate will be released from the electrical system. and reopen. Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when it is opened or closed automatically. The tailgate should never be obstructed in any way when it is operated. Operating the tailgate manually Interrupting automatic opening/closing The power tailgate can be disconnected from the vehicle’s electrical system by quickly pulling the outer handle twice. The tailgate can then be opened/closed manually. Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can be interrupted in four ways: Folding down the rear seat backrests • By pressing the The rear seat backrests can be folded down for additional loading space, see page 88. button on the lighting panel. • By pressing the button on the remote key. • By pressing the button on the lower edge of the tailgate. • By pressing the rubber-covered button under the outer handle on the tailgate. 272 Pinch protection • If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop WARNING NOTE If the tailgate has been opened and closed continuously for more than 60 seconds, the automatic function will be deactivated to avoid overloading the electrical system. The automatic function can be used again after approximately 10 minutes. If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate will stop and reopen. 06 During your trip Loading The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to help anchor items in the cargo area. Grocery bag holder* WARNING • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden stops. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle. G017745 Load anchoring eyelets Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo area The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags in place. 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo area. 06 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273 06 During your trip Loading Roof loads Using load carriers Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in use: • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle. • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are designed to carry the maximum allowable roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). For non-Volvo roof racks, check the manufacturer's weight limits for the rack. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh limits and never exceed the maximum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads 06 evenly. • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof. 274 • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the load. • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast cornering and hard braking. 06 During your trip Cargo area Steel cargo grid* Installing the steel cargo grid Installing the cover For information about the necessary tools and procedures for installing/removing the steel cargo grid, please refer to the assembly instructions1 that were included when the grid was purchased. 1. Press the end piece on one side of the cargo area cover into the retaining bracket . in the side panel of the cargo area 2. Do the same on the opposite side . 3. Press both sides of the cover until they click into place . The red mark will no longer be visible. Cargo area cover* G031978 4. Check that both ends of the cover are securely locked in place. Removing the cover 1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover inward. G031977 Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger compartment. Folding the grid up/down Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it rearward/upward, or push it downward/forward. Folding down the cargo area cover's rear flap Use • Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it NOTE If the steel grid is to be used with the optional cargo area cover, the grid must be folded down before the cargo area cover is put in place. 1 2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket. into the holes in the rear cargo area pillars. • To retract (roll up) the cover, release it from the holes and guide it toward the rear seat backrest. 06 The cargo area cover's rear flap points horizontally when the cover is retracted (rolled up). To fold it down: Pull the flap slightly rearward past its supports and fold it down. Assembly instruction no. 30715972. `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275 06 During your trip Cargo area NOTE WARNING On models equipped with this cover, it should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors. G034213 Cargo net* 06 Cargo net mounted in rear position Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo net made of strong nylon fabric that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger compartment. The net can be attached in two different places: • Be sure that the cargo net's upper attachment hooks are properly inserted in the brackets and that the lower straps are correctly attached and pulled taut. • A damaged cargo net should never be used. • Objects in the cargo area should be securely anchored, even if the cargo net is correctly installed and in use. Mounting the cargo net Cargo net in rear position The cargo net is easiest to put in place through one of the rear doors. 4. Mounting in the rear position: With the net's rod attached to the rear upper brackets, hook the lower straps in the floor eyelets in the cargo area. Pull the net strap taut. 1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that the upper hinged rod is straight and locked in position. 2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure that the lock on the lower strap is facing toward you. 3. Insert the other end of the rod in the opposite bracket. • Rear position: behind the rear seat backrest • Front position: behind the front seat backrests 276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. – Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod as far forward as possible in the brackets. 06 During your trip Cargo area Removing and storing the cargo net Cargo net in front position Mounting in the front position: With the net's rod attached to the front upper brackets, hook the lower straps in the eyelets in the front seat rails. Attaching the net is easier if the front seat backrests are upright and the seats are moved slightly forward. Press the release buttons on the locks on the straps and pull out a small section of the strap. If the front seats are moved rearward, they should not press hard against the net. Fold up the net's rod at the center and roll up the net. CAUTION Press in the catches on the straps' hooks and remove the hooks from the eyelet. 06 When not in use, the cargo net can be stored under floor of the cargo area. Pressure from the front seats against the cargo net could damage the net and/or its brackets. 5. Pull the net strap taut. 277 06 During your trip Towing a trailer Introduction Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle. when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range. WARNING • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not be used on Volvos, nor should safety chains be attached to the bumper. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle rear axle must not be used. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle brake system, nor a trailer's lighting system directly to the vehicle lighting system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation. • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety wire must be correctly fastened to the hole or hook provided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety wire should never be fastened to or wound around the drawbar ball. • If the automatic transmission begins to NOTE See page 353 for the maximum trailer and tongue weights recommended by Volvo. • Observe the legal requirements of the state/province in which the vehicles are • All Volvo models are equipped with energy-absorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not interfere with the proper operation of this bumper system. 06 Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems, but take into consideration: • Increase tire pressure to recommended full pressure. See the tire inflation table on page 291. • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched 278 overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window. • Avoid overload and other abusive operation. • Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy. • It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe stop (check and observe state/local regulations). • Do not connect the trailer's brake system directly to the vehicle's brake system. • More frequent vehicle maintenance is required. • Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not being used. • Volvo recommends the use of synthetic engine oil when towing a trailer over long distances or in mountainous areas. 06 During your trip Towing a trailer NOTE • • • • 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in P. Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt. Removing the ball holder When starting on a hill, put the gear selector in D before releasing the parking brake. See also page 123 for more detailed information about starting off on a hill while towing a trailer. C If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift positions while towing a trailer, make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine (using too high a gear). A The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights. Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15 %. Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground. 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly. D E B G010496 • Detachable trailer hitch (accessory) 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly. NOTE Ball holder Locking bolt A cover for the hitch assembly is also included in the kit. Cotter pin Hitch assembly Safety wire attachment Installing the ball holder 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly. 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly. Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway and is part of the Dynamic Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC). See page 149 for information on DSTC. 06 Function A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying at speeds `` 279 06 During your trip Towing a trailer between approximately 45-55 mph (70-90 km/ h). Swaying may be caused by factors such as: • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, strong crosswind • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an uneven road surface or drive over a bump • Sudden movements of the steering wheel Facts about TSA • TSA intervenes at speeds above approximately 40 mph (60 km/h) • The DSTC symbol ( ) in the instrument panel will flash when TSA is working • If the driver switches off the DSTC system's Spin Control function, TSA will also be switched off (but will be on again the next time the engine is started) 06 • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly How TSA works Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control the vehicle and trailer. The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral 280 movement. If the system detects a tendency to sway, the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle. If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion, the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have once again become stable, TSA will no stop regulating the brakes/engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle. 06 During your trip Emergency towing Towing eyelet ded on the right sides of either the front or rear bumper (see illustration). There are two different types of covers over the openings for the towing eyelet and they have to be opened differently. • If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, etc., into the notch and pry open the edge of the cover. Open the cover completely and remove it. Location of the towing eyelet NOTE On certain models equipped with a trailer hitch, the towing eyelet cannot be screwed into the hole in the rear bumper. The towing rope should be attached to the trailer hitch instead. For this reason, the detachable section of the trailer hitch should be safely stowed in the vehicle at all times. CAUTION • If the cover has a mark along one edge or in a corner, press the mark while prying out the opposite side/corner using a coin, etc. Open the cover and remove it. Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place. After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage location. If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed. WARNING • Press the cover for the attachment point back into position. Attaching the towing eyelet Attaching the towing eyelet The towing eyelet is located under the floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire and may be partially concealed. This eyelet must be screwed into the positions provi- • Remember that the power brakes and power steering will not function when engine is not running. The braking and steering systems will function but considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal and greater steering effort must be exerted. 06 The towing eyelets must not be used for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe strain. Do not use the towing eyelets to pull the vehicle up onto a flat bed tow truck. `` 281 06 During your trip Emergency towing Precautions when the vehicle is being towed • Attach jumper cables (see page 114) to • provide current for releasing the electric parking brake and to move the gear selector from the P position to N. • Be sure that the steering wheel lock is released (see page 90). • While the vehicle is being towed, set the exceed the maximum allowable towing speed. • Maximum distance with front wheels on ground: 50 miles (80 km). 06 Please check with state and local authorities before attempting this type of towing, as vehicles being towed are subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing device, lighting, etc. • If the vehicle's battery is dead, do not attempt to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it as this will damage the three-way catalytic converter(s). The engine must be jump started using an auxiliary battery (see page 114). • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to pull the vehicle up onto the flat bed or to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator. ignition in mode II if the battery is not drained so that the headlights/taillights can be switched on. See page 82 for information on the ignition modes. • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not • While the vehicle is being towed, try to keep the tow rope taut at all times. • The vehicle should only be towed in the forward direction. CAUTION Vehicles with AWD (All Wheel Drive) with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at speeds above 50 mph (70 km/h) or for distances longer than 30 miles (50 km). Towing vehicles with front wheel drive/ All Wheel Drive Volvo recommends the use of flat bed equipment. • If wheel lift equipment must be used, please use extreme caution to help avoid damage to the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle should be towed with the rear wheels on the ground if at all possible. • If it is absolutely necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground, 282 please refer to the towing information on page 281. CAUTION CAUTION • Sling-type equipment applied at the front will damage radiator and air conditioning lines. • It is equally important not to use slingtype equipment at the rear or apply lifting equipment inside the rear wheels; serious damage to the rear axle may result. • If the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed truck, the towing eyelets must not be used to secure the vehicle on the flat bed. Consult the tow truck operator. 06 During your trip 06 283 General information .............................................................................. Tire inflation........................................................................................... Inflation pressure ................................................................................. Tire designations .................................................................................. Glossary of tire terminology ................................................................. Vehicle loading ..................................................................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................................... Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires ............................................... Temporary Spare ................................................................................. Tire Sealing System.............................................................................. Changing a wheel ................................................................................ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................. 284 286 289 291 292 294 295 297 298 299 300 306 309 WHEELS AND TIRES 07 Wheels and tires General information Introduction Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to the vehicle's tire information placard on the B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). CAUTION Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry pavement performance with consideration for hydroplaning resistance. They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD or DSTC system, these tires are not designed for winter driving, and should be replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate. 07 The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces. Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires 1 286 Option or accessory on some models without the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on all four wheels. Tire age When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires are the same size designation, type (radial) and preferably from the same manufacturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering the car's roadholding and handling characteristics. Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging process. The temporary spare1 should also be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been used. New Tires A tire's age can be determined by the DOT stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration should be replaced immediately. Improving tire economy • Maintain correct tire pressure. See the tire inflation table on page 291. • Drive smoothly: avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire screeching. • Tire wear increases with speed. • Correct front wheel alignment is very important. Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of 2000, the manufacturing week and year (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1510 means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2010). • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and driving comfort. • Tires must maintain the same direction of rotation throughout their lifetime. 07 Wheels and tires General information • When replacing tires, the tires with the • Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's most tread should be mounted on the rear wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer during hard braking. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the tires and/or wheels permanently. braking properties and ability to force aside rain, snow and slush. WARNING • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such installations. • The tires with the most tread should always be at the rear (to reduce the risk of skidding). • Contact a Volvo workshop if you are Summer and winter tires unsure about the tread depth. Storing wheels and tires When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on rims), they should be suspended off the floor or placed on their sides on the floor. Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended. G021778 Tire wear The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire • When switching between summer and winter tires, mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear CAUTION Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, dry, dark place, and should never be stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc. Tire rotation Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire wear is affected by a number of factors such as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving style, etc. 07 • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall. `` 287 07 Wheels and tires General information • If the tires are rotated, they should only be moved from front to rear or vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left. are printed on the side of the tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction. • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some customers find that tire rotation may help to get extra mileage from tire life. When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. • Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm). NOTE Tread wear indicator G021829 07 The tires have wear indicator strips running across or parallel to the tread. The letters TWI 288 07 Wheels and tires Tire inflation Inflation placard G032521 NOTE Tire inflation placard Tire inflation Check tire inflation pressure regularly. See the tire inflation table on page 291. A tire inflation pressure placard is also located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pressure. • The placards shown indicate inflation pressure for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory only. • A certain amount of air seepage from the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly. • Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare, at least once a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. • Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. WARNING • Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. • Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure, which can be found on the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label. Checking tire pressure Cold tires Inflation pressure should be checked when the tires are cold. 07 The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. `` 289 07 Wheels and tires Tire inflation After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. NOTE • • If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Consult the tire inflation pressure table on page 291 or see the inflation pressure placard. To check inflation pressure: 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve. Tire ratings 2. Add air to reach the recommended air pressure. The speed ratings in the table translate as follow: Speed ratings 3. Replace the valve cap. 07 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak. 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities. 290 Speed ratings M 81 mph (130 km/h) Q 100 mph (160 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) Speed ratings W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (300 km/h) Load ratings See page 292 for an explanation of the load rating on the sidewall of the tire. 07 Wheels and tires Inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflation placard (see page 289 for its location) for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Tire size 235/65 R17 Cold tire pressure for up to 5 persons Front Rear psi/kPa psi/kPa 35/240 35/240 61/420 61/420 235/60 R18 235/55 R19 255/45 R20 Temporary spare tire NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications. 07 291 07 Wheels and tires Tire designations Information on the sidewall 5 6 7 9 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The larger the number, the wider the tire. 8 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width in percent. 4 3. R: Radial tire. 10 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in inches). 3 2 12 G010753 11 1 Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires (see the illustration). The following information is listed on the tire sidewall: 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 1521 lbs (690 kg). 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h). The tire designation: NOTE NOTE 07 292 Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle. The tire's load index and speed rating may not appear on the sidewall because they are not required by law. 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = All Season 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, 1510 means that the tire was manufactured during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall purposes. 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B-Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. 07 Wheels and tires Tire designations 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades: see page 297 for more information. 12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. 07 293 07 Wheels and tires Glossary of tire terminology Terms • Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer. • Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load carrying capability. • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. 294 unit of air pressure. • B-pillar: The structural member at the side showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. 07 • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc. of the vehicle behind the front door. to the rim. • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This rating is established by the tire manufacturer. • Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. • Recommended tire inflation pressure: inflation pressure, established by Volvo, which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this chapter. • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. 07 Wheels and tires Vehicle loading Loads Permissible axle weight Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its maximum permissible weight. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard: Gross vehicle weight (GVW) The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers. Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment. Capacity weight All weight added to the curb weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo weight. NOTE For trailer towing information, please refer to the section "Towing a trailer" on page 278. 1 NOTE • The location of the various labels in your vehicle can be found on page 350. • A table listing important weight limits for your vehicle can be found on page 353. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement "the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual1 to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. 07 See page 278. `` 295 07 Wheels and tires Vehicle loading WARNING 07 296 • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information. 07 Wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grading information ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR TEMPERATURE The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving habits, maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. TRACTION The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C 07 297 07 Wheels and tires Snow chains, snow tires, studded tires Winter driving conditions Snow chains Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the following restrictions: • Snow chains should be installed on front CAUTION • Check local regulations regarding the use of snow chains before installing. • • Use single-sided snow chains only. wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow chains. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires and wheels are installed and are of a size different than the original tires and wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT be used. Sufficient clearances between chains and brakes, suspension and body components must be maintained. • Some strap-on type chains will interfere with brake components and therefore CANNOT be used. • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains should only be installed on the front wheels. • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices. 07 Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow chain information. • Always follow the chain manufacturer's installation instructions carefully. Install chains as tightly as possible and retighten periodically. Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed limit. (Under no circumstances should you exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. • The handling of the vehicle can be adversely affected when driving with chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well as locked wheel braking. Snow tires, studded tires1 Tires for winter use: • Owners who live in or regularly commute through areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving conditions are strongly advised to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the highest degree of traction. • It is important to install winter tires on all four wheels to help retain traction during 1 298 Where permitted cornering, braking, and accelerating. Failure to do so could reduce traction to an unsafe level or adversely affect handling. • Do not mix tires of different design as this could also negatively affect overall tire road grip. • Winter tires wear more quickly on dry roads in warm weather. They should be removed when the winter driving season has ended. • Studded tires should be run-in 300 – 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which the vehicle should be driven as smoothly as possible to give the studs the opportunity to seat properly in the tires. The tires should have the same rotational direction throughout their entire lifetime. NOTE Please consult state or provincial regulations restricting the use of studded winter tires before installing such tires. 07 Wheels and tires Temporary Spare Spare tire The spare tire in your vehicle1 is called a "Temporary Spare". Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on. In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer. WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). CAUTION The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission. 1 07 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system. 299 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System Location Accessing the tire sealing system The tire sealing system is stowed under the floor of the cargo area. To access it: WARNING • After using the tire sealing system, the vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles (200 km). • Have the tire inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must be replaced. • The vehicle should not be driven faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a tire that has been temporarily repaired with the tire sealing system. • After using the tire sealing system, drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers and sudden stops. 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. NOTE • Introduction • Tires with large holes or tears cannot be repaired with the tire sealing system. • After use, stow the tire sealing system properly to help prevent rattling. Certain models are equipped with a tire sealing system* that enables you to temporarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re-inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. 07 The system consists of an air compressor, a container for the sealing compound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12-volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve. The 12-volt sockets are located in the front tunnel console, on the rear side of the center console in the rear seat and in the cargo area*, see page 200. 300 The tire sealing system is only intended to seal holes on the tire’s tread area, not the sidewall. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System Tire sealing system–overview WARNING Please keep the following points in mind when using the tire sealing system: • • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in the illustration) contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex. These substances are harmful if swallowed. The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. • Inhalation: Move the person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention. NOTE Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. Precautions: Speed limit sticker On/Off switch Electrical wire Bottle holder (orange cover) Protective hose cover Air release knob • • • Keep out of reach of children. • Hands should be washed thoroughly after handling. Air pressure gauge Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. First aid: • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. Hose Bottle with sealing compound Do not ingest the contents. 07 `` 301 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System Tire sealing system–temporarily repairing a flat tire NOTE Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, etc.) from the tire before using the sealing system. WARNING Contact with the sealing compound may cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, wash the affected area immediately with soap and water. • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary. WARNING • Never leave the tire sealing system unattended when it is operating. • Keep the tire sealing system away from children. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic. • Apply the parking brake. 4. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle of sealing compound. NOTE Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is screwed into the holder. 5. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. WARNING G014338 Stage 1: Sealing the hole 07 Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two stages: • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping sealing compound into the tire. The car is then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire. 302 1. Open the cover on the tire sealing kit. 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it to the steering wheel hub where it will be clearly visible to the driver. 3. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down). The bottle is equipped with a catch to keep it securely in place and help prevent sealing compound leakage. Once in place, the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the tire sealing system’s hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand. 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System 7. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle. 8. Start the vehicle’s engine. WARNING The vehicle´s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system. 9. Start the tire sealing system’s compressor by pressing the on/off switch to position I. WARNING • Never stand next to the tire being inflated when the compressor is in operation. • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, switch off the compressor immediately. • If there is visible damage to the sidewall or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. The vehicle should not be driven if this occurs. Contact a towing service or Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if applicable. NOTE The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approximately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing compound is being pumped into the tire. The pressure should return to a normal level after approximately 30 seconds. 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap. 13. Immediately drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute the sealing compound in the tire. CAUTION 10. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating. If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the use of the sealing compound may lead to incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. Use the tire sealing system to check and adjust the damaged tire's inflation pressure. NOTE • Safely stow the tire sealing system in a convenient place as it will soon be used again to check the tire’s inflation pressure. • The empty bottle of sealing compound cannot be removed from the bottle holder. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to have the bottle removed and properly disposed of. WARNING If the pressure remains below 22 psi (1.8 bar) after approximately seven minutes, turn off the compressor. In this case, the hole is too large to be sealed and the vehicle should not be driven. 11. Switch off the compressor and disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. 07 `` 303 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System WARNING If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering behavior, or noises should occur while driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a safe place. Recheck the tire for bumps, cracks, or other visible damage, and recheck its inflation pressure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not continue driving. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure 1. Connect the tire sealing system as described in stage 1. 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor. If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise. CAUTION 07 The sealing compound container must be replaced if: • the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire • the container’s expiration date has passed Inflating tires The tire sealing system can be used to inflate the tires. To do so: 1. Park the car in a safe place. 2. The compressor should be switched off. Ensure that the on/off switch is in position 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be pressed down). (see the date on decal). NOTE 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. • After use, the sealing compound bottle, the hose, and certain other system components must be replaced. Please consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts. 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose connector onto the valve as tightly as possible by hand. • If the sealing compound bottle’s expiration date has passed, please take it to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station that can properly dispose of harmful substances. 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle. WARNING • The vehicle’s engine should be running when the tire sealing system is used to avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, or outdoors, before using the system. • Children should never be left unattended in the vehicle when the engine is running. The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating. WARNING If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 hour, check the inflation pressure in the damaged tire again before continuing. 304 Replacing the sealing compound container 07 Wheels and tires Tire Sealing System 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge. 8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this chapter for the correct inflation pressure. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press the on/off switch to position I). If necessary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise. CAUTION The compressor should not be used for more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating. 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off switch to position 0) when the correct inflation pressure has been reached. 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation valve and reinstall the valve cap. 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the 12-volt socket. 07 305 07 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel Removing a wheel WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the “Temporary Spare” in use. CAUTION The vehicle must never be driven with more than one temporary spare wheel. Location of jack*, towing eyelet1 and tools* Spare wheel The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tire pressure table on page 291. The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the rim side down. There are two foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and one over/inside. The upper one contains all tools. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam blocks. Taking out the spare wheel 1. Open the floor hatch. 2. Undo the retaining bolt. 07 3. Lift out the foam block. 4. Lift out the spare wheel. The other two blocks can remain in the spare wheel well. 1 306 The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration on page 281 for its location. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. After use The foam block and spare wheel must be replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow on the upper foam block. It should point forward. Changing a wheel 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P. 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the towing eyelet and the wheel cover removal tool* stowed under the floor of the trunk. 3. Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the removal tool or remove the wheel cover by hand. 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground with wooden blocks or large stones. 07 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel Jack attachment points Lug wrench and towing eyelet 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug wrench as shown in the illustration. CAUTION The towing eyelet must be screwed into the lug wrench as far as possible. 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward (counterclockwise) pressure. 7. There are two jack attachment points on each side of the vehicle. Position the jack correctly in the attachment (see the illustration) and crank while simultaneously guiding the base of the jack to the ground. The base of the jack must be flat on a level, firm, non-slippery surface. Before raising the vehicle, check that the jack is still correctly positioned in the attachment. 07 `` 307 07 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel WARNING WARNING There are two attachment points near the rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most attachment point is intended for the jack (see the illustration). 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground. 07 9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and remove the wheel. • The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle. 5. Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's inflation valve must be positioned over the valve. Re-installing the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and hub. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. 308 Tighten the lug nuts 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten handtight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 07 Wheels and tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Introduction NOTE USA – FCC ID: KR5S122780002 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The tire pressure monitoring system1 uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver located in the vehicle. When low inflation pressure is detected, TPMS will light up the tire pressure warning light ) (also referred to as a telltale) in the ( instrument panel and will display one of the following messages in the text window: Tire pressure low or Tire needs air now. 1 NOTE If a fault occurs in TPMS, the tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute and Tire press. syst Service required will be displayed. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 07 Not available in all markets or in all models. `` 309 07 Wheels and tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) NOTE TPMS indicates low tire pressure but does not replace normal tire maintenance. For information on correct tire pressure, please refer to the tire inflation pressure table in this chapter or consult your Volvo retailer. Changing wheels with TPMS Please note the following when changing or replacing the factory installed TPMS wheels/ tires on the vehicle: • Only the factory-mounted wheels are CAUTION When inflating tires with TPMS valves, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve. equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. • If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary Erasing warning messages When a low tire pressure warning message has been displayed, and the tire pressure warning light has come on: 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of all four tires. 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure (consult the tire pressure placard or the inflation pressure table on page 291. 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This will erase the warning text and the warning light will go out. 07 WARNING Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle. spare tire, this tire does not have a TPMS sensor. NOTE • If you change to tires with a different recommended inflation pressure, the TPMS system must be recalibrated to these tires. On U.S. models, this must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. On Canadian models, see the following section "Recalibrating TPMS." • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor is moved to another wheel, the sensor's seal, nut, and valve core should be replaced. • When installing TPMS sensors, the vehicle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a TPMS error message will be displayed. • If wheels without TPMS sensors are mounted on the vehicle, TIRE PRESS SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be displayed each time the vehicle is driven above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not reappear. If the message is still displayed, drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to erase the message. • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be fitted on all wheels used on the vehicle. Volvo does not recommend moving sensors back and forth between sets of wheels. Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models only) In certain cases, it may be necessary to recalibrate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recommended tire inflation pressures (see the infla- 310 07 Wheels and tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tion pressure table on page 291), for example, if higher inflation pressure is necessary when transporting heavy loads, etc. 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure This is done in the vehicle's menu system (see page 134). 4. Select Tire pressure system ON/Off and press OK/MENU. To recalibrate: 1. Switch off the engine. 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure and put the ignition in mode I or II (see page 82 for additional information). 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK/MENU again. 5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) continuously for at least 1 minute. > When the calibration message is no longer displayed, TPMS has been recalibrated to the new inflation pressure. 07 Activating/deactivating TPMS (Canadian models only) 1. Switch off the engine. 2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see page 82 for additional information). 311 Volvo maintenance................................................................................ Maintaining your car............................................................................. Hood and engine compartment............................................................ Engine oil............................................................................................... Fluids..................................................................................................... Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... Wiper blades and washer fluid.............................................................. Battery................................................................................................... Fuses..................................................................................................... Vehicle care........................................................................................... 312 314 315 317 318 320 322 329 331 334 342 MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 08 Maintenance and specifications Volvo maintenance Introduction Volvo advises you to follow the maintenance program outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. This maintenance program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your vehicle. The maintenance services contain several checks that require special tools and training, and therefore must be performed by a qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manufacturers to furnish written instructions to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper servicing and function of the components that control emissions. These services, which are listed in the "Warranty and Service Records Information" booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will be required to pay for labor and material used. Maintenance 08 314 Your Volvo passed several major inspections before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties is provided. • • • • New Vehicle Limited Warranty Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty • Emission Design and Defect Warranty • Emission Performance Warranty These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for detailed information concerning each of the warranties. Periodic maintenance helps minimize emissions Periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle running well. Your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet provides a com- prehensive periodic maintenance schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000 km) of vehicle maintenance. The schedule includes components that affect vehicle emissions. This page describes some of the emission-related components. 08 Maintenance and specifications Maintaining your car Owner maintenance As needed: Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt residues. The following points can be carried out between the normally scheduled maintenance services. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect. Each time the car is refueled: • Check the engine oil level. • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, headlights, and taillights. Monthly: NOTE Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect the tires for wear. Hoisting the vehicle • Check that engine coolant and other fluid They are specially reinforced to bear the weight of the vehicle. A garage jack can also be placed under the front of the engine support frame. Take care not to damage the splash guard under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or similar structures. If a two-post hoist is used to lift the vehicle, the front and rear lift arm pads should be centered under the reinforced lift plates on the inboard edge of the sill rail (see illustration). Emission inspection readiness What is an Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)? OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission controls. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system that is not performing within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will store a message about any fault. levels are between the indicated "min" and "max" markings. • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass cleaner and soft paper towels. • Wipe driver information displays with a soft cloth. • Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information. How do states use OBD II for emission inspections? If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, the two jack attachments points should be used. Many states connect a computer directly to a vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then read "faults." In some states, this type of 08 `` 315 08 Maintenance and specifications Maintaining your car inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission test. How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission inspection? Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your vehicle may fail inspection. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • If you recently had service for a lit Check 08 316 Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. A half-hour trip of mixed stop-and-go/high- way driving is typically needed to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip. • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your vehicle's maintenance schedule. 08 Maintenance and specifications Hood and engine compartment Opening and closing the hood Battery WARNING Relay and fuse box Check that the hood locks properly when closed. Washer fluid reservoir Air cleaner Engine compartment, overview WARNING The cooling fan may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. WARNING G031911 The ignition should always be completely switched off before performing any operations in the engine compartment. Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock. An information symbol will illuminate when the hood is open. Lift the hood slightly. Press the release control (located under the right front edge of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model. Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Radiator Filler cap for engine oil The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when: • Replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc. • Do not touch any part of the distributor ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended movements and body injury. 08 Cover over brake fluid reservoir 317 08 Maintenance and specifications Engine oil Checking the engine oil Checking and adding oil The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. NOTE Before checking the oil: • See page 356 for oil specifications. • Refer to the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for information on the oil change intervals. • The car should be parked on a level surface. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off. CAUTION 08 318 • Not checking the oil level regularly can result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low. • Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine. • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives. • Always add oil of the same type and viscosity as already used. • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This could cause an increase in oil consumption. The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick • Oil changes should be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a lintfree rag. G021737 Location of the filler cap and dipstick Checking the oil Volvo recommends Castrol oil products 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. 08 Maintenance and specifications Engine oil 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark. WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces. NOTE Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance intervals except at owner request and at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer. 08 319 08 Maintenance and specifications Fluids Coolant Location of the coolant reservoir CAUTION • If necessary, top up the cooling system with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Antifreeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and antifreeze). • Different types of antifreeze/coolant may not be mixed. • If the cooling system is drained, it should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze. • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there can be high local temperatures in the engine which could result in damage. Check coolant regularly! • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. Normally, the coolant does not need to be changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. See page 357 for information on cooling system capacities. • 08 320 Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicle's cooling system. WARNING • Never remove the expansion tank cap while the engine is warm. Wait until the engine cools. • If it is necessary to top off the coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly so that the overpressure dissipates. Brake fluid Location of the brake fluid reservoir Checking the level The fluid reservoir is concealed under the round cover at the rear of the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be accessed. 08 Maintenance and specifications Fluids The brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the reservoir. Check, without removing the cap, that there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. Fluid type: DOT 4+ boiling point >536 °F Filling 1. Turn and open the cover. 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. (280 °C), P/N 9437433 Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. WARNING If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel. Power steering fluid CAUTION Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be necessary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING • • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake-related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. Dot 4+ should never be mixed with any other type of brake fluid. Check the level frequently. The fluid does not require changing. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see page 357. 08 321 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs Introduction All bulb specifications are listed on page 328. The following bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician: • • • • • • • • • WARNING • The engine should not be running when changing bulbs. • If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compartment will be hot. Dome lighting, reading lights Glove compartment lighting Footwell lighting Turn signals in the door mirrors WARNING Approach lighting in the door mirrors Brake lights/rear fog light/taillights • Active Bending Lights* – due to the high voltage used by these headlights, these bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Turn off the lights and remove the remote key from the ignition before changing any bulbs. Rear parking lights Active Bending Lights LED bulbs See page 328 for a list of bulb specifications. NOTE For information regarding any other bulbs not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. The entire headlight housing must be lifted out when replacing all front bulbs. CAUTION Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which will damage it. 08 322 Headlight housing * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs NOTE • Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb. • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 4. (Lower illustration under "Headlight housing") Unplug the wiring connector by holding down the clip with your thumb. Pull out the connector with the other hand. 5. Lift out the housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. Removing the headlight housing 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). 1. Switch off the ignition by briefly pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button. Reinserting the headlight housing 2. Remove the remote key from the ignition slot1. 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into place. 2. Reinstall the headlight housing and locking pins. Check that they are correctly inserted. The headlight housing must be properly inserted and secured in place before the lighting is switched on or the remote key is inserted into the ignition slot. 3. Check that the lights function properly. The headlight wiring must be connected and the housing must be securely in place before the ignition is switched on. Removing the cover to access the bulbs 3. (Upper illustration under "Headlight housing") Withdraw the headlight housing's locking pins. Pull the headlight housing straight out. CAUTION When disconnecting the connector, pull on the connector itself and not on the wiring. When reinserting the housing, be sure that the long locking pin (to the left in the illustration) is securely in place in both of its retaining clamps. 08 1 Does not apply to vehicles with the optional keyless drive. `` 323 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 322. 1. Open the retaining clamps by pressing them to the sides. 2. Pull the cover straight out. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order. Low beam, Halogen 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder downward. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it snaps into place. It can only be secured in one position. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can only be secured in one position. 6. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing. High beam, Halogen 7. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. Extra high beam2 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 322). 08 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 323). 2 324 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only. 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 322). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 323). 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 322). 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see page 323). 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 322). 3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the bulb holder. 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the headlight housing. 4. Remove the bulb holder from the headlight housing by pulling it straight out. 3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb. 5. Insert a new bulb in the holder until it snaps in place. It can only be inserted in one way. 4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in slightly and turning it counterclockwise. 6. Press the bulb holder into position in the headlight housing. 5. Press the new bulb into the holder and turn it clockwise. 7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb holder. 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing and turn it clockwise. 8. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. 7. Reinstall the headlight housing. Side marker lights Turn signals NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 322. 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see page 322). 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out of the headlight housing. 3. Pull out the burned out bulb and install a new one. It can only be inserted in one position. 4. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight housing and turn it clockwise. 5. Reinstall the headlight housing. 08 `` 325 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs Rear fog light The rear fog light (located on the driver's side of the vehicle) can be reached from behind the bumper 1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise. 2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise. 3. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it clockwise. 4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. 08 Location of taillight bulbs Taillight lens, right side Parking/side marker lights (LED) Brake lights and taillights The brake lights and taillights are replaced from inside the cargo area. Side reflector NOTE Brake light Backup light Turn signal Brake lights (LED) NOTE If an error message remains in the display after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 322. 1. Open the panel. 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise. 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it clockwise. 5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. 326 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs License plate lighting Cargo area lighting Vanity mirror lighting G031942 Removing the mirror glass 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing and pull it out. NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 322. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and tighten the screws. 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge, in the center, turn and carefully pry up the lug on the edge. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the bulb housing comes loose. 2. Carefully detach and lift out the entire mirror glass. 2. Replace the bulb. 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press it back into the bulb housing. Reinstalling the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mirror glass back into position. 2. Press the three lower lugs back into position. 08 `` 327 08 Maintenance and specifications Replacing bulbs Bulb specifications 08 328 Lighting function Wattage Bulb Extra high beam (models with Active Bending Lights*) 55 H7 LL Low beam (halogen) 55 H11 LL High beam (halogen) 65 H9 Front turn signals 21 PY21W LL License plate lighting 5 C5W LL Vanity mirror 1.2 SV5.5 (length 35mm) Front side marker lights 5 W3W LL Glove compartment lighting 5 SV8.5 (length 43mm) Lighting function Wattage Bulb Rear fog light 21 P21W LL Backup lights 21 P21W LL Brake lights 21 P21W LL Cargo area lighting 10 SV8.5 (length 43mm) NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications Wiper blades and washer fluid Wiper blades The windshield wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer than the one on the passenger side. Service position 4. With the remote key in the ignition slot1, put the ignition in mode 0. 5. Move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. The wipers will then move to the vertical (service) position on the windshield. The wipers can be returned to the normal position by briefly switching on the ignition (or by starting the engine). Replacing the windshield wiper blades Wiper blades in service position The wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. To put them in this position: With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. 1. While sitting in the driver's seat, close the driver's door. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place. 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot1 Check that the blade is securely in place. 3. Put the ignition in mode II (see page 82). 1 08 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive. `` 329 08 Maintenance and specifications Wiper blades and washer fluid Filling washer fluid Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent. Replacing the tailgate wiper blade Location of the washer fluid reservoir G032770 The windshield and headlight washers share a common reservoir. 1. Fold the wiper arm outward. 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the arrow). 3. Pull out the blade to release it from the wiper arm. 08 4. Press the new wiper blade into place and check that it seats securely. 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate window. 330 The washer fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side of the engine compartment. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. For capacities, see page 357. 08 Maintenance and specifications Battery Warning symbols on the battery may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Risk of explosion Wear protective goggles. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances. Recycle properly Keep away from children. • Never use a quick charger to charge the battery. Avoid smoking, open flames, and/or sparks. See the owner's manual. CAUTION NOTE A used battery should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a recycling station. Handling Contains corrosive acid. • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened. • Never disconnect the battery when the The infotainment system's energy-saving feature may not function correctly or at all, and/or a message may be displayed if a battery charger or jumper cables are not connected properly. • The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a jumper cable or a battery charger. Only the ground point on the chassis may be used. See page 114 for an illustration and additional information. engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery). • If the battery is fully discharged a number of times, this may shorten its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold 08 `` 331 08 Maintenance and specifications Battery WARNING • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • • Do not smoke near the battery. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. • Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running, or when the key is in the ignition. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system. • The battery should be disconnected from the vehicle when a battery charger is used directly on the battery. • To help keep the battery in good condition, the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging function. • If the battery is fully discharged a number of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life. NOTE The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Maintenance • Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances. • If necessary, add distilled water. The level should never be above the indicator. • The fluid level should be checked if the battery has been recharged. • After inspection, be sure the cap over each battery cell or the cover is securely in place. 08 • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened. 332 CAUTION • Always use distilled or deionized water (battery water). • Never fill above the level mark in the cell. Changing 08 Maintenance and specifications Battery information in the vehicle's electrical system can be stored in the control modules. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber molding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by pulling it away. Detach the black negative cable. Detach the red positive cable Detach the ventilation hose from the battery Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp. Move the battery to the side and lift it up. WARNING Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence. Removal Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key from the ignition slot and wait at least 5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so that all WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Installation 2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the battery. 4. Connect the ventilation hose. > Be sure that it is correctly connected to the battery and the vent in the vehicle's body. 5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). 8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See Removal). 08 1. Lower the battery into the battery box. 333 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Replacing fuses Location of the fuse boxes There are relay/fuse boxes located in the engine compartment, the passenger compartment, and the cargo area. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. To do so: 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is difficult to remove, a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the engine compartment fuse box cover. 2. From the side, examine the curved metal wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse). If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electrical system inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system. 08 334 Engine compartment Under the glove compartment Under the glove compartment Cargo area 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Engine compartment 08 `` 335 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Engine compartment, upper Pos Engine compartment, front Function A Circuit breaker 60 Engine compartment, lower Pos Function A Engine Control Module (ECM), transmission, SRS 10 Heated washer nozzles* 10 – Positions These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. Fuses in are located under . • • Headlight washers* 20 Windshield wipers 30 Lighting panel 5 - NOTE • – – Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be changed at any time when necessary. Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/ circuit breakers and should only be removed or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. There is a special fuse removal tool on the underside of the cover. Climate system blower 40 - – ABS pump 40 ABS valves 20 Engine compartment box 5 Auxiliary lights* 20 Horn 15 – Pos 08 336 10 Engine Control Module (ECM) 10 50 Active Bending Lightsheadlight leveling* Circuit breaker 50 20 Control module, automatic transmission 15 Central electrical module Circuit breaker 60 ABS 5 Compressor A/C 15 Circuit breaker 60 Speed-dependent steering force* 5 Relay coils 5 Function A Circuit breaker * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Pos Function A Starter motor relay 30 Ignition coils 20 Engine Control Module 10 Injection system, mass air meter, engine control module 15 A/C compressor, engine valves, engine control module 10 EVAP valve, heated oxygen sensor 15 Fuel leakage detection 5 – Cooling fan 80 Electro-hydraulic power steering 100 08 `` 337 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Under the glove compartment Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse boxes. Pos 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. - 2. The fuses are accessible. - Positions-fuse box A - Pos Function A Circuit breaker for the infotainment system and for fuses 16-20 40 08 - 338 Function * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. A 12-volt socket (cargo area) 15 Controls in driver's door 20 Pos Function A Controls in front passenger's door 20 Controls in right rear passenger's door 20 Controls in left rear passenger's door 20 Keyless drive* 20 Power driver's seat* 20 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Pos Function A Pos Power front passenger's seat* 20 - 15 Heated front passenger's seat* 15 Folding rear seat head restraints* Heated driver's seat* 15 Infotainment control module 5 5 Infotainment system, Sirius satellite radio* 10 Park assist*, trailer hitch control module*, park assist camera* Infotainment system 15 All Wheel Drive* control module 5 Bluetooth hands-free system 5 Active chassis system* 10 Rear Seat Entertainment system (RSE)* 7.5 A Pos Laminated panoramic roof* 5 Positions-fuse box B Pos Courtesy lighting, climate system sensor Function Function A Tailgate wiper 15 - 12-volt sockets 15 Heated rear seat* (passenger's side) 15 Heated rear seat* (driver's side) 15 Front courtesy lighting, driver's door power window controls, power seat(s)*, HomeLInk® Wireless Control System* 7.5 Instrument panel information display 5 Function A Adaptive cruise control/ collision warning* 10 Courtesy lighting, rain sensor* 7.5 Steering wheel module 7.5 Cental locking: fuel filler door 10 Tailgate window washer 15 Windshield washer 15 Tailgate unlock 10 - 10 Fuel pump 20 Climate system control panel 5 Alarm movement sensor* Alarm, On-board diagnostic system 5 08 `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 339 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Pos Function A Airbag system, occupant weight sensor 10 Collision warning system* 5 Accelerator pedal, autodim mirror function, heated rear seats* 7.5 Brake lights 5 Laminated panoramic roof* 20 Immobilizer 5 08 340 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and specifications Fuses Cargo area Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area Positions Pos Pos Rear fuse box A Electric parking brake (left side) 30 Electric parking brake (right side) 30 Rear fuse box A Power tailgate* 30 - A Trailer socket 1* 40 - NOTE 30 - Trailer socket 2* Rear fuse box - Heated rear window Pos 15 Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications. 08 - * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 341 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care Washing the car The following points should be kept in mind when washing and cleaning the car: • The car should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently in the wintertime. • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. Doing so may cause detergents and wax to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. considerably and also helps prolong the service life of the wiper blades. • Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel CAUTION • During high pressure washing, the spray mouthpiece must never be closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray into the locks. • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can reduce lighting capacity considerably. Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling. housings, fenders, etc). • In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended. NOTE When washing the car, remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills. Special laminated panoramic roof cautions: • Always close the laminated panoramic roof and sun shade before washing your vehicle. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork • as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may be permanently damaged. Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the laminated panoramic roof. • Never use wax on the rubber seals around the laminated panoramic roof. • A detergent can be used to facilitate the softening of dirt and oil. • Dry the car with a clean chamois and remember to clean the drain holes in the doors and rocker panels. • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover after the car has been washed. • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy 08 342 water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility Exterior components Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning products, available at your Volvo retailer, for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental components such as chromed strips on the exterior of your vehicle. The instructions for using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be used. 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care CAUTION • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components • Polishing chromed strips can wear away or damage the surface • Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used Automatic car wash • We do NOT recommend washing your car CAUTION • Before driving into an automatic car wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to avoid damaging the windshield wipers. • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them. • in an automatic wash during the first few months (because the paint will not have hardened sufficiently). • An automatic wash is a simple and quick way to clean your car, but it is worth remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the car with sponge and water. Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic washers do not have facilities for washing the underbody. Chromed wheels: Clean chromeplated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can permanently stain chrome-plated wheels. WARNING • • When the vehicle is driven immediately after being washed, apply the brakes, including the parking brake, several times in order to remove any moisture from the brake linings. Engine cleaning agents should not be used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk. Exterior lighting mal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time. Polishing and waxing • Normally, polishing is not required during the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial. • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be removed with kerosene or tar remover. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing compound. • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. • Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax. • Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface. • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can be purchased today. These waxes are easy to use and produce a long-lasting, highgloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading. • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). 08 Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is nor`` 343 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care CAUTION Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings, some of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been tested by Volvo for compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by application of paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty. Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product. Upholstery care Fabric Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. AlcanteraTM suede-like material Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a soft cloth and mild soap solution. 08 Leather care Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, 344 sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result. 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a towel, and allow the leather to dry completely. Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight. Protecting leather upholstery Volvo also offers a special leather softener that should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. Cleaning leather upholstery 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements. 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do not rub. 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the upholstery with light circular movements. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. This will help the leather resist staining and protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care CAUTION • • Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather since these can cause damage. Take extra care when removing stains such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread. • Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding. • Start from the outside of the stain and work toward the center. • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing may damage the textile upholstery. • gent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer. Paint repairs require special equipment and skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage. Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood surfaces Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo touch-up paint. Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo retailer. Color code Minor stone chips and scratches Touching up paintwork Material: • • • • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. Primer – can Paint – touch-up pen Brush Masking tape If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt. Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution. NOTE Cleaning floor mats Paint code on the model plate1 The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild deter- Paint damage requires immediate attention to avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. Touch-up if necessary. 1 Make sure you have the right color. The color code number is stated on the model plate. When touching up the vehicle, it should be clean and dry. The surface temperature should be above 60 °F (15 °C). 08 see page 350 for the location of the model plate. `` 345 08 Maintenance and specifications Vehicle care Minor scratches on the surface If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the metal and an undamaged layer of paint remains, the touch-up paint can be applied as soon as the spot has been cleaned. G021832 Repairing stone chips 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 08 346 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application. 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish. 08 Maintenance and specifications 08 347 Label information.................................................................................. Specifications........................................................................................ Overview of information and warning symbols..................................... Volvo programs..................................................................................... 348 350 352 359 362 SPECIFICATIONS 09 Specifications 09 Label information Location of labels 350 09 Specifications Label information List of labels Model plate. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Codes for color and upholstery, etc. The model plate is located on the rear side of the B-pillar (the pillar between the front and rear passenger doors) and the rear passenger's door must be open in order to see it. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. 09 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts. Vehicle Emission Control Information. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the underside of the hood. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory. Canadian models have the upper decal; U.S. models have the lower one. 351 09 Specifications 09 Specifications Dimensions 352 Dimension In (mm) A Wheelbase 109.2 (2774) B Length 182.2 (4627) C Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789) D Load length, floor 38.3 (972) E Height 67.4 (1713) F Load height 31.6 (802) G Track, front 64.3 (1632) 09 Specifications Specifications Dimension In (mm) H Track, rear 62.4 (1586) I Load width, floor 42.9 (1090) J Width 74.4 (1891) K Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.5 (2120) L Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.4 (1891) 09 Weights Category USA Gross vehicle weight 6-cyl. FWDA: 5200 lbs 6-cyl. Canada AWDB: 5355 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 2360 kg 6-cyl. AWD:2430 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD:2440 kg Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models) Permissible axle weights, front 6-cyl. FWD: 2740 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1245 kg 6-cyl. AWD: 2800 lbs 6-cyl. AWD:1270 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2840 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD:1290 kg 6-cyl. FWD: 2545 lbs 6-cyl. FWD: 1155 kg 6-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs 6-cyl. AWD:1200 kg 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 2645 lbs 6-cyl. turbo AWD:1200 kg 3870 - 4140 lbs 1750 – 1880 kg Permissible axle weights, rear Curb weight `` 353 09 Specifications Specifications 09 Category USA Canada Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,300 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1500 kg 165 lbs 75 kg Max. tongue weight A B FWD = Front Wheel Drive AWD = All Wheel Drive Engine specifications 354 Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA Engine designation B6324S5 B6324S4 B6304T4 Output (kW/rps) 179/107 171/108 224/93 Output (hp/rpm) 240/6400 230/6500 300/5600 Torque (Nm/rps) 320/53 300/55 440/35 – 70 Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 236/3200 221/3300 325/2100 – 4200 No. of cylinders 6 6 6 Bore (in/mm) 3.3/84 3.3/84 3.23/82 Stroke (in/mm) 3.78/96 3.78/96 3.67/93.2 09 Specifications Specifications A Specification/Model 3.2 6-cyl. 3.2 6-cyl. 3.0TA Displacement 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 3.19 liters (194.8 cu. in.) 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.3:1 9.3:1 09 This engine may not be available on all markets `` 355 09 Specifications 09 Specifications Engine oil Engine oil must meet the minimum ILSAC specification GF-4, API SL, or ACEA A1/B1. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection. good fuel economy and engine protection. See the viscosity chart. American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol G023491 Depending on your driving habits, premium or synthetic oils may provide superior fuel economy and engine protection. Consult your Volvo retailer for recommendations on premium or synthetic oils. G022917 Volvo recommends Castrol. Oil additives must not be used. Synthetic oil is not used when the oil is changed at the normal maintenance services. This oil is only used at customer request, at additional charge. Please consult your Volvo retailer. Oil viscosity Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide 356 Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation Synthetic oils meeting SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40 and complying with oil quality requirements are recommended for driving in areas of sustained temperature extremes (hot or cold), when towing a trailer over long distances, and for prolonged driving in mountainous areas. The API Service Symbol "donut" is divided into three parts: • The upper section describes the oil's performance level. • The center identifies the oil's viscosity. • The lower section indicates whether the oil has demonstrated energy-conserving properties in a standard test in comparison to a reference oil. 09 Specifications Specifications 09 Oil volume Engine model Volume (incl. filter) 3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters) 3.0T (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters) Other fluids and lubricants Fluid System Volume Specification Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.4 US qts (7 liters) Transmission fluid AW-1 3.2 (6-cyl.) 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) 3.0T 9.4 US qts. (8.9 liters) Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see packaging. All models 1.7 lbs (770 g) Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a), PAG oil Brake fluid 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) DOT 4+ Power steering 1.26 US qts (1.2 liters) Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product. Washer fluid 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water. Transmission oilA Coolant Air conditioning 4.7 US qts (4.5 litersB) Fuel tank volume A B 3.0T/3.2 6 cyl. 18.5 US gallons (70 liters) Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. Models without headlight washers `` 357 09 Specifications 09 Specifications Electrical system General information 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alternator. Single pole system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the chassis. Performance, battery Engine 3.2 6-cyl./3.0T Voltage (V) 12 Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 700 Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 135 WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION If the battery is replaced, replace it with a battery of the same cold start capacity and reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery). 358 09 Specifications Overview of information and warning symbols Introduction Symbols in the main instrument panel The symbols in the vehicle's various displays are divided into three main categories: Warning symbols Symbol • Warning symbols • Indicator symbols • Information symbols Description Indicator symbols Symbol Warning symbol Low oil pressure 78 Parking brake 78 Information symbol The information symbol lights up and a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. SRS airbags 78 Seat belt reminder 79 Generator not charging 79 Fault in the brake system 79 Warning symbol 79 A A Canadian models P. no. Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL)*system 77 Malfunction indicator light 77 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 77 Rear fog light on 77 Stability system (DSTC), Hill Descent Control, Trailer Stability Assist* 77 Tire pressure monitoring sensor (TPMS) 77 Low fuel level 77 A A The red warning symbol lights up to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. Description P. no. The following tables list the most common symbols, their meaning and the pages in this manual that provide more detailed information. 09 A `` * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 359 09 Specifications Overview of information and warning symbols 09 Symbol Description P. Symbol Description no. A Description no. P. no. 77 Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert* 156, 162, 164 Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection* 178 High beam indicator 76 Adaptive Cruise Control * 156, 162 Driver Alert System* 180 Left turn signal indicator 76 76 Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert* 156, 162, 164 Active Bending Lights (ABL)* 93 Right turn signal indicator Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert* 156, 162, 164 Fuel filler door (arrow indicates it is on right side of vehicle) 76 Adaptive Cruise Control* 156, 162 Rain sensor* 98 Driver Alert System* 181 Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning* 183 Other information symbols Description P. no. Adaptive Cruise Control * 156, 162 Adaptive Cruise Control * 156, 162 Adaptive Cruise Control *, Distance Alert* 156, 162, 164 Radar sensor* 360 Symbol Information symbol, see text in information display Canadian models Symbol P. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Camera* Laser sensor* 159 176 09 Specifications Overview of information and warning symbols Symbol Description P. no. Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning* 183 Adaptive Cruise Control * 156, 162 09 Information symbols in the ceiling console Symbol Description P. no. Seat belt reminder 19 Occupant Weight Sensor 26 Information symbols in the center console display Symbol Description P. no. Audio files 223 CD folder 223 Video files 223 Bluetooth-connected cell phone 234 BluetoothTM handsfree 234 HD radio 216 Park Assist* 186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361 09 Specifications 09 Volvo programs Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. Additional information, features, and benefits are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63VOLVO) In Canada 1-800-263-0475 Technician certification In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Certified technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition. 362 09 Specifications 09 363 10 Index 10 1, 2, 3 ... Anti-lock brake system warning light......................................... 76 oil........................................................ 357 shiftlock override................................ 117 12-volt sockets........................................ 200 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)................. 120 Axle weight.............................................. 295 Approach lighting................................ 58, 96 A Air distribution.......................................... 140 Audio system AUX/USB sockets............................... Bluetooth devices............................. Bluetooth hands-free system........... Bluetooth streaming audio................. general functions................................ getting started.................................... HD digital radio................................... introduction......................................... media player....................................... menus................................................. overview.............................................. radio functions.................................... Rear seat entertainment..................... Sirius satellite radio............................ sound settings.................................... steering wheel keypad........................ voice control....................................... Air distribution table................................. 146 Auto-dim rearview mirror......................... 104 Air vents................................................... 141 Automatic locking retractor....................... 38 All Wheel Drive......................................... 118 Automatic transmission Geartronic................................... 116, 117 general description..................... 116, 117 ABS (anti-lock brake system).................. 120 Accessory installation warning.................. 13 Active chassis system............................. 151 Active yaw control................................... 149 Adaptive brake lights............................... 119 Adaptive cruise control.................... 154, 156 Airbags disconnecting the front passenger’s side................................................. 26, 27 front...................................................... 22 inflatable curtain................................... 32 side impact........................................... 30 Air conditioning........................................ 144 Anti-freeze....................................... 264, 320 364 227 230 233 230 211 206 216 204 223 256 204 214 245 218 212 209 241 B Battery changing..................................... 332, 333 maintenance....................................... 332 remote key, replacing........................... 61 specifications...................................... 358 warning symbols................................. 331 Black box................................................... 11 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)....................................... 194, 195, 196 Bluetooth cell phone connection............. 233 Booster cushion, integrated...................... 49 Booster cushions....................................... 46 Brake lights.............................................. 119 Brake system ABS..................................................... Brake pad inspection.......................... checking fluid level............................. emergency brake assistance.............. fluid..................................................... 120 119 320 120 357 10 Index Chains...................................................... 298 Collision warning system................. 172, 173 Check engine light..................................... 76 Compass in rearview mirror..................... 105 Child restraints recalls and registration......................... 39 Conserving electrical current................... 263 Child restraint systems.............................. booster cushions.................................. convertible seats.................................. infant seats........................................... ISOFIX/LATCH anchors........................ top tether anchors................................ 40 46 44 42 47 48 Convertible seats....................................... 44 37 46 40 44 42 Cruise control.................................. 152, 153 adaptive.............................................. 154 Camera, Park Assist................................ 190 Child safety................................................ booster cushions.................................. child restraint systems.......................... convertible seats.................................. infant seats........................................... Capacity weight....................................... 295 Child safety locks...................................... 52 Cargo area changing bulbs................................... 327 steel grid............................................. 275 City Safety™............................................ 167 general information............................. 119 Hill Descent Control............................ 125 warning light......................................... 78 Bulbs cargo area lighting.............................. 327 headlights........................... 322, 323, 324 introduction......................................... 322 license plate lights.............................. 327 side marker lights............................... 325 specifications...................................... 328 taillight................................................ 326 C Controls, center console.......................... 256 Coolant............................................ 320, 357 Cooling system, general information....... 263 Courtesy lighting.................................. 95, 96 Crash mode............................................... 36 Curb weight............................................. 295 Current, conserving................................. 263 D Cell phone, hands-free connection......... 233 Climate system........................................ 144 air distribution............................. 140, 146 air vents.............................................. 141 Interior Air Quality System.................. 140 introduction......................................... 139 passenger compartment filter............ 139 refrigerant........................................... 139 Cell phone voice control.......................... 241 Clock, setting............................................. 80 Dome lighting....................................... 95, 96 Central locking system, introduction......... 56 Cold weather driving................................ 264 Door mirrors............................................. 103 Cargo area cover..................................... 275 Cargo area net......................................... 276 Catalytic converter................................... 269 10 Defroster.................................................. 144 Detachable key blade................................ 61 Dimensions.............................................. 352 Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag....................................................... 26, 27 365 10 Index 10 Driver alert............................................... 180 Engine Drag Control (EDC)...................... 149 Driver distraction warning.......................... 13 Engine oil checking............................................. 318 low pressure warning light.............. 77, 78 specifications...................................... 356 volumes.............................................. 357 Driving economically................................ 262 Driving in cold weather............................ 264 Driving through water.............................. 263 Environment............................................... 12 Fuel filler door, opening........................... 268 Fuel level warning light.............................. 77 Fuel requirements............................ 266, 267 Fuel tank volume..................................... 357 Fuses............................... 334, 335, 338, 341 E Eyelets for anchoring loads..................... 273 ECC................................................. 144, 145 Economical driving.................................. 262 F Electric parking brake.............................. 122 Federal Clean Air Act............................... 314 Electronic Climate Control....... 142, 144, 145 air distribution table............................ 146 Interior Air Quality System.................. 145 Floor mats cleaning.............................................. 345 placing correctly................................. 112 Emergency locking retractor...................... 38 Fluid specifications.................................. 357 Geartronic................................................ 117 Emergency starting.................................. 114 Fog lights front/rear............................................... 94 rear...................................................... 326 Geartronic automatic transmission.. 116, 117 Emergency towing........................... 281, 282 Emission inspection readiness................ 315 366 Fuel filler cap........................................... 269 Engine overheating........................................... 79 specifications...................................... 354 starting................................................ 112 switching off....................................... 114 Four C (active chassis system)................ 151 Engine compartment overview................ 317 Front seats........................................... 84, 86 Front airbags.............................................. 22 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag.................................................. 26, 27 Front park assist.............................. 186, 188 G Garage door opener HomeLink® Wireless Control System. 109 Gasoline requirements............................. 267 Gas tank volume...................................... 357 Gauges...................................................... 75 Generator warning light............................. 78 Glossary of tire terminology..................... 294 Grocery bag holder.................................. 273 Gross vehicle weight............................... 295 10 Index H I Hazard warning flashers............................ 94 Ignition modes........................................... 82 HD digital radio........................................ 216 Immobilizer................................................ 57 rear seat entertainment system, remote control................................................. 254 sound settings.................................... 212 voice control....................................... 241 Headlights Active Bending Lights........................... 93 changing bulbs........................... 323, 324 high/low beams.................................... 92 high beam flash.................................... 92 Important information.................................. 8 Inspection readiness................................ 315 Indicator lights......................... 75, 76, 77, 78 Instrument lighting..................................... 92 Infant seats................................................ 42 Instrument overview............................ 74, 75 Inflatable Curtain........................................ 32 Instrument panel...................................... 131 Headlight washers..................................... 99 Inflation pressure..................................... 289 Integrated two-stage booster cushion...... 49 Headphones............................................ 246 Inflation pressure table............................ 291 Interior Air Quality System....................... 140 Head restraints, rear seat.......................... 87 Information and warning symbols, table of.............................................................. 359 Interior lighting..................................... 95, 96 Information lights..................... 75, 76, 77, 78 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors............................. 47 Heated oxygen sensors........................... 270 Heated rear seats.................................... 143 High beams................................................ 92 indicator light........................................ 77 Hill Descent Control................................. 125 Hoisting the vehicle................................. 315 HomeLink® Wireless Control System...... 109 Home safe lighting..................................... 96 Hood, opening/closing............................ 317 Horn........................................................... 91 10 iPod connector (audio system)............. 227 Information symbol.................................... 77 Infotainment system................................ AUX/USB sockets............................... Bluetooth devices............................. Bluetooth® hands-free system........... general functions................................ getting started.................................... media player....................................... menus................................................. radio functions.................................... rear seat entertainment....................... 204 227 230 233 211 206 223 256 214 245 J Jack attaching............................................. 306 location of........................................... 306 Jump starting........................................... 114 367 10 Index K 10 Low fuel level warning light........................ 77 Low oil pressure warning light................... 78 Key blade....................................... 56, 61, 63 Keyless drive general description............................... 63 starting the vehicle............................. 112 Net in cargo area..................................... 276 M Main instrument panel............................. 131 L Labels list of................................................... 351 location of........................................... 350 Mirrors defroster............................................. power door......................................... rearview, auto-dim function................ retractable........................................... vanity.................................................. Locks, child safety..................................... 52 Low beams................................................ 92 Octane recommendations....................... 267 Oil Leather care............................................. 344 Locking the vehicle.................................... 58 Occupant weight sensor...................... 26, 27 Odometer, trip........................................... 80 Messages in the instrument panel........... 131 Locking...................................................... 66 tailgate.................................................. 67 Occupant safety........................................ 16 Media player (infotainment system)......... 223 LATCH anchors......................................... 47 Loading the vehicle.......................... 271, 295 roof loads............................................ 274 O Malfunction indicator light......................... 76 Menu........................................................ 133 Load anchoring eyelets........................... 273 368 Maintenance............................................ 314 hoisting the vehicle............................. 315 performed by the owner..................... 315 Laminated panoramic roof...................... 106 Lighting panel............................................ 92 N 104 103 104 103 200 checking............................................. 318 specifications...................................... 356 volumes.............................................. 357 On Call Roadside Assistance.................. 362 Overhead courtesy lighting.................. 95, 96 Overheating, engine................................... 79 Oxygen sensors, heated.......................... 270 Motor oil checking............................................. 318 specifications...................................... 356 volumes.............................................. 357 P MY CAR................................................... 133 Park assist....................................... 186, 188 Paint, touching up.................................... 345 10 Index Park Assist Camera................................. 190 Parking brake electric, applying/releasing................. 122 warning light......................................... 78 Parking lights............................................. 94 R Radio Sirius satellite radio............................ 218 Radio functions........................................ 214 HD digital radio................................... 216 Personal Car Communicator, unique functions........................................................... 59 Rain sensor................................................ 98 Polishing.................................................. 343 READ button............................................ 131 Power front seat memory function................................... 85 with keyless drive................................. 86 Rear fog light..................................... 94, 326 Power mirrors.......................................... 103 defroster............................................. 104 Rear seat entertainment (option) headphones........................................ 246 menus................................................. 251 remote control.................................... 254 Power steering fluid..................................................... 321 speed-dependent............................... 151 Power steering fluid................................. 357 Power tailgate.......................................... 271 Power windows....................................... 101 laminated glass................................... 102 Pregnancy, using seat belts during........... 20 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 114, 333, 358 Rear park assist............................... 186, 188 Rear seat entertainment.......................... 245 Rear seat head restraints........................... 87 Rear seats center head restraint............................. 87 folding................................................... 87 heated................................................. 143 Rearview mirror auto-dim function............................... 104 compass............................................. 105 Rear window defroster............................ 104 Refrigerant............................................... 357 Refueling.......................................... 266, 267 fuel filler cap....................................... 269 fuel filler door...................................... 268 fuel tank volume................................. 357 10 Registering child restraints........................ 39 Remote control........................................ 254 replacing batteries.............................. 255 Remote key................................................ 56 approach lighting.................................. 58 immobilizer........................................... 57 key blade........................................ 56, 61 key memory.......................................... 57 locking the vehicle................................ 58 Personal Car Communicator.......... 58, 59 replacing the battery............................. 61 unlocking the vehicle............................ 58 Remote key/PCC common functions................................ 58 Reporting safety defects............................ 17 Roadside Assistance............................... 362 Rollover Protection System (ROPS).......... 35 Roll Stability Control (RSC)........................ 35 Roof loads............................................... 274 Recalls, child restraints.............................. 39 369 10 Index S 10 Safety, occupant........................................ 16 Safety defects, reporting........................... 17 Seat belt reminder................................................ 19 Seat belts Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor.................................... 38 buckling................................................ 18 maintenance......................................... 18 pretensioners........................................ 18 reminder................................................ 18 reminder warning light.......................... 78 securing child restraint systems.......................................... 42, 44, 46 unbuckling............................................ 18 use during pregnancy........................... 20 using..................................................... 18 Seats, front.......................................... 84, 85 Sensus..................................................... 130 Shiftlock..................................................... 11 Side door mirrors..................................... 103 Side impact airbags................................... 30 Side marker lights, changing bulbs......... 325 Sirius satellite radio.................................. 218 370 Snow chains............................................ 298 Snow tires................................................ 298 Spare tire................................................. 299 Speed-dependent steering...................... 151 Spin control............................................. 149 Sunroof laminated panoramic roof................... 106 Supplemental restraint system.................. 21 warning light......................................... 78 Symbols, overview................................... 359 SRS............................................................ 21 Stability system............................... 149, 150 Engine Drag Control (EDC)................. 149 indicator light........................................ 77 Starting the engine.................................. 112 with keyless drive............................... 112 Starting the vehicle after a crash (crash mode).................... 36 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)........................ 57 Steel grid in cargo area............................ 275 Steering wheel adjusting............................................... 90 horn....................................................... 91 keypad.................................. 90, 133, 209 Locking/unlocking................................ 90 Stone chips, touching up......................... 345 Storage spaces........................................ 198 Studded tires........................................... 298 T Tailgate driving with it open............................. 262 locking/unlocking.................................. 67 power operated.................................. 271 wiper/washer........................................ 99 Tailgate wipers......................................... 330 Taillights, changing bulbs........................ 326 Temporary spare tire............................... 299 Three-way catalytic converter................. 269 Tire designations..................................... 292 Tire inflation pressure.............................. 291 Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 309, 310 indicator light........................................ 77 Tires......................................................... age...................................................... changing from summer to winter........ glossary of terms................................ 286 286 287 294 10 Index improving economy............................ inflation pressure................................ inflation pressure table....................... load ratings......................................... rotation............................................... snow................................................... spare................................................... specifications...................................... speed ratings...................................... storing................................................. studded............................................... tire pressure monitoring system......... tread wear indicator............................ uniform tire quality grading................. 286 289 291 290 287 298 299 290 290 287 298 309 288 297 Top tether anchors (child restraint systems).......................................................... 48 Touching up paint.................................... 345 Transmission general description..................... 116, 117 oil........................................................ 357 shiftlock override................................ 117 V Vanity mirror............................................ 200 changing bulbs................................... 327 Tread wear indicator................................ 288 Vehicle dimensions.................................. 352 Trip computer.......................................... 147 Vehicle Event Data..................................... 11 Trip odometers.......................................... 80 Vehicle loading................................ 271, 295 roof loads............................................ 274 Trips, long distance................................. 264 Turn signals............................................... 95 changing bulbs................................... 325 indicator lights...................................... 77 Vehicle maintenance................................ 314 performed by the owner..................... 315 Two-stage booster cushion....................... 49 Voice control cell phones......................................... 241 U Vehicle weights........................................ 353 Volvo and the environment........................ 12 Volvo maintenance.................................. 314 Towing a trailer................................ 278, 279 trailer hitch.......................................... 279 Uniform Tire Quality Grading................... 297 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance........ 362 Unlocking the tailgate................................ 67 Volvo programs....................................... 362 Towing the vehicle........................... 281, 282 Unlocking the vehicle.......................... 58, 66 Volvo Sensus........................................... 130 Traction control........................................ 149 Upholstery care....................................... 344 Trailer towing................................... 278, 279 trailer hitch.......................................... 279 10 W Warning flashers, hazard........................... 94 Warning lights.......................... 75, 76, 77, 78 Warning symbol......................................... 79 371 10 Index Warning system, collision................ 172, 173 10 Warranties................................................ 314 Washer fluid..................................... 330, 357 Washers headlight............................................... 99 windshield............................................. 98 Water, driving through............................. 263 Waxing..................................................... 343 Weights.................................................... 353 Wheels..................................................... 286 changing............................................. 306 storing................................................. 287 Whiplash Protection System..................... 33 Windows power.................................................. 101 Windshield IR coating........................................... 100 rain sensor............................................ 98 washers................................................ 99 wipers/washers..................................... 98 Windshield washer fluid................... 330, 357 Windshield wipers.................................... 329 Wiper blades replacing tailgate wiper...................... 330 replacing windshield wipers............... 329 372 Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&('*,JH68VcVYV!6I&&'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%&&!8deng^\]i©'%%%"'%&&Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc
advertisement